WO2022057918A1 - 电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质 - Google Patents

电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022057918A1
WO2022057918A1 PCT/CN2021/119298 CN2021119298W WO2022057918A1 WO 2022057918 A1 WO2022057918 A1 WO 2022057918A1 CN 2021119298 W CN2021119298 W CN 2021119298W WO 2022057918 A1 WO2022057918 A1 WO 2022057918A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
channel
communication device
electronic device
link
reflection
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/119298
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
周郑颐
王昭诚
葛宁
曹建飞
Original Assignee
索尼集团公司
周郑颐
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 索尼集团公司, 周郑颐 filed Critical 索尼集团公司
Priority to US18/021,175 priority Critical patent/US20230318177A1/en
Priority to CN202180062718.1A priority patent/CN116711158A/zh
Priority to EP21868740.8A priority patent/EP4207491A4/en
Publication of WO2022057918A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022057918A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01Q—ANTENNAS, i.e. RADIO AERIALS
    • H01Q3/00—Arrangements for changing or varying the orientation or the shape of the directional pattern of the waves radiated from an antenna or antenna system
    • H01Q3/44—Arrangements for changing or varying the orientation or the shape of the directional pattern of the waves radiated from an antenna or antenna system varying the electric or magnetic characteristics of reflecting, refracting, or diffracting devices associated with the radiating element
    • H01Q3/46—Active lenses or reflecting arrays
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00—Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
    • H04L25/0204—Channel estimation of multiple channels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01Q—ANTENNAS, i.e. RADIO AERIALS
    • H01Q15/00—Devices for reflection, refraction, diffraction or polarisation of waves radiated from an antenna, e.g. quasi-optical devices
    • H01Q15/0006—Devices acting selectively as reflecting surface, as diffracting or as refracting device, e.g. frequency filtering or angular spatial filtering devices
    • H01Q15/0013—Devices acting selectively as reflecting surface, as diffracting or as refracting device, e.g. frequency filtering or angular spatial filtering devices said selective devices working as frequency-selective reflecting surfaces, e.g. FSS, dichroic plates, surfaces being partly transmissive and reflective
    • H01Q15/002—Devices acting selectively as reflecting surface, as diffracting or as refracting device, e.g. frequency filtering or angular spatial filtering devices said selective devices working as frequency-selective reflecting surfaces, e.g. FSS, dichroic plates, surfaces being partly transmissive and reflective said selective devices being reconfigurable or tunable, e.g. using switches or diodes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/04013—Intelligent reflective surfaces
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00—Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
    • H04L25/0224—Channel estimation using sounding signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00—Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
    • H04L25/024—Channel estimation channel estimation algorithms
    • H04L25/0242—Channel estimation channel estimation algorithms using matrix methods

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of wireless communication, and more particularly, to an electronic device, a wireless communication method, and a non-transitory computer that perform channel estimation or precoding in the presence of an intelligent reflective surface between two communication devices used as transceivers Readable storage medium.
  • IRS intelligent reflecting surface
  • the direct link and the reflected link may have different propagation delays. Therefore, it is desirable to properly estimate the delay difference between the propagation delays of the two links.
  • an object of at least one aspect of the present disclosure is to provide an electronic device, a wireless communication method, and a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium capable of having a smart reflective surface between two communication devices serving as transceivers appropriate channel estimation or precoding.
  • the time delay difference between the propagation delay of the direct link between the transceivers not via the smart reflector and the propagation delay of the reflective link via the smart reflector is appropriately estimated.
  • an electronic device comprising a processing circuit configured to: obtain information obtained via a plurality of channel measurements, with respect to a relationship between a first communication device and a second communication device, and the like
  • the second communication device uses a corresponding set of channel information based on the reference signal sent by the first communication device and the smart reflector between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the reflection parameter reflects the reflection signal sent by the reference signal to obtain a channel information; and by performing joint processing on the multiple groups of reflection parameters used in multiple channel measurements and the acquired multiple channel information, it is determined that it can be combined with the intelligent reflection surface
  • the reflection parameters together characterize the channel estimates of the multiple integrated sub-channels of the equivalent channel.
  • an electronic device comprising a processing circuit configured to: calculate a first pre-prediction based on channel estimates of a plurality of integrated sub-channels obtained using the electronic device of the first aspect a coding matrix; and based on the first precoding matrix, calculating the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device, so that an equivalent precoding matrix is generated based on the calculated reflection parameters and the second precoding matrix Similar to the first precoding matrix.
  • an electronic device including a processing circuit configured to: a first steering vector based on a smart reflective surface in a direction of an angle of arrival of a first communication device relative to the smart reflective surface And the second steering vector of the smart reflective surface in the direction of departure angle of the second communication device relative to the smart reflective surface, calculate the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface located between the first communication device and the second communication device, wherein the first communication There is no direct link between the device and the second communication device; and a precoding vector for the first communication device is calculated based on a third steering vector of the first communication device in the direction of departure angle of the smart reflective surface relative to the first communication device.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: acquiring a plurality of channel information about an equivalent channel between a first communication device and a second communication device obtained through a plurality of channel measurements , in each channel measurement, the second communication device uses a corresponding set of reflection parameters to reflect the reference signal based on the reference signal sent by the first communication device and the intelligent reflection surface between the first communication device and the second communication device A channel information is obtained from the reflected signal sent out; and by jointly processing the multiple sets of reflection parameters used in multiple channel measurements and the acquired multiple channel information, it is determined that the reflection parameters that can be used with the smart reflecting surface can be used to characterize the said Channel estimation of multiple integrated sub-channels of the equivalent channel.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: calculating a first precoding matrix according to channel estimates of a plurality of integrated subchannels obtained by using the electronic device or wireless communication method of the first aspect; And based on the first precoding matrix, calculate the reflection parameter of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device, so that the equivalent precoding matrix generated based on the calculated reflection parameter and the second precoding matrix is the same as the first precoding matrix.
  • the precoding matrix is similar.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: a first steering vector based on the smart reflective surface in the direction of the arrival angle of the first communication device relative to the smart reflective surface and the smart reflective surface on the second
  • the second steering vector of the communication device relative to the departure angle direction of the smart reflective surface calculates the reflection parameter of the smart reflective surface located between the first communication device and the second communication device, wherein the relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device is and calculating the precoding vector of the first communication device based on the third steering vector of the first communication device in the direction of the departure angle of the smart reflective surface relative to the first communication device.
  • an electronic device comprising a processing circuit configured to: via a first link from another communication device to the electronic device and from the other communication device The device receives the predetermined reference signal sent by the other communication device via the second link of the smart reflective surface to the electronic device; and based on the first reception time expected to receive the predetermined reference signal via the first link and the actual The difference between the second reception times of the predetermined reference signals received by the two links is estimated, and the delay difference between the propagation delay of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link is estimated.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: via a first link from another communication device to an electronic device and from the another communication device via a smart reflective surface to the electronic device a second link of the device, receiving a predetermined reference signal sent by the other communication device; and based on a first reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is expected to be received via the first link and a first time at which the predetermined reference signal is actually received via the second link
  • the difference between the two reception times is estimated as the delay difference between the propagation delay of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link.
  • an electronic device comprising processing circuitry configured to: via a first link from the electronic device to another communication device and from the electronic device via a second link of the smart reflector to the other communication device, sending a predetermined reference signal to the other communication device for the other communication device to receive the predetermined reference signal based on the first link expecting to receive the predetermined reference signal
  • the difference between the reception time and the second reception time when the predetermined reference signal is actually received via the second link is estimated as the delay difference between the propagation delay of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: via a first link from an electronic device to another communication device and communicating from the electronic device to the another via a smart reflective surface a second link of the device to send a predetermined reference signal to the other communication device for the other communication device to receive the predetermined reference signal via the first link based on the first reception time and the actual via the second link A time delay difference between the propagation delay of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link is estimated by the difference between the second reception times of the predetermined reference signals.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing executable instructions, the executable instructions, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to execute the above wireless communication method or electronic device of each function.
  • an equivalent channel is characterized with reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface together with a plurality of integrated sub-channels, thereby
  • the channel estimates of each integrated sub-channel can be determined by jointly processing multiple sets of reflection parameters used for multiple channel measurements and multiple obtained channel information.
  • a first precoding matrix may be calculated using the channel estimates of multiple integrated subchannels obtained in the above manner, and reflection parameters of the smart reflector and a first precoding matrix may be calculated based on the first precoding matrix.
  • a second precoding matrix of a communication device so that the reflection parameters can be properly set and the data signal can be properly precoded.
  • the relationship between the first communication device and the smart reflective surface and the relationship between the smart reflective surface and the second communication device can be utilized.
  • the departure angle and/or the arrival angle between the communication devices, the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the precoding vector of the first communication device are calculated, so that the reflection parameters can be properly set and the data signal can be properly precoded in a simplified manner.
  • the propagation of a direct link between the transceivers without passing through the smart reflective surface can be properly estimated The delay difference between the delay and the propagation delay of the reflective link through the smart reflector.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the basic working principle of a smart reflective surface
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example application scenario of a smart reflective surface
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining an equivalent channel in a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a first configuration example of the electronic device according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a determination unit in the electronic device shown in FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a second configuration example of the electronic device according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a third configuration example of the electronic device according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an information interaction process according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of an information interaction process according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a first configuration example of the electronic device according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a second configuration example of the electronic device according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining an equivalent channel in a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system in a specific situation
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a first configuration example of the electronic device according to the third embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a second configuration example of the electronic device according to the third embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 15 is a flowchart showing a process example of the wireless communication method according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 16 is a flowchart illustrating a process example of a wireless communication method according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a process example of a wireless communication method according to a third embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic device according to fourth and fifth embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • 19 is a schematic diagram for explaining a channel in a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system
  • 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example process of estimating a delay difference based on a predetermined downlink reference signal
  • 21 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example process of estimating a delay difference based on an uplink predetermined reference signal
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram for illustrating a direct link and a reflected link in the case where two timing advance values are set and applied;
  • FIG. 23 is a simulation diagram illustrating the normalized capacity of a channel under the condition of using a direct link and a reflected link in different ways
  • 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the fourth embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the fifth embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 26 is a block diagram illustrating a first example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which techniques of this disclosure may be applied;
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating a second example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which techniques of the present disclosure may be applied;
  • FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone to which the techniques of the present disclosure may be applied;
  • FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation apparatus to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied.
  • Example embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will be thorough, and will fully convey the scope to those skilled in the art. Numerous specific details are set forth such as examples of specific components, devices, and methods in order to provide a thorough understanding of embodiments of the present disclosure. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that specific details need not be employed, that example embodiments may be embodied in many different forms, and that neither should be construed to limit the scope of the disclosure. In some example embodiments, well-known processes, well-known structures and well-known technologies are not described in detail.
  • each array element or reflection unit in the array can reflect the electromagnetic wave incident on the front surface, adjust the phase of the reflected wave according to the phase adjustment coefficient, and optionally adjust the amplitude of the electromagnetic wave according to the amplitude adjustment coefficient .
  • the above-mentioned phase adjustment coefficient and amplitude adjustment coefficient are also collectively referred to as reflection parameters herein.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the basic working principle of the smart reflective surface, which schematically shows a traditional application scenario of the smart reflective surface.
  • the smart reflector is used to realize the reconfigurable reflect array antenna, that is, the active antenna 101 and the smart reflector 102 are integrated together, and the active antenna 101 is used to illuminate the smart reflector 102 to generate reflected waves,
  • the receiving end 103 receives the electromagnetic waves reflected from the smart reflecting surface 102 to realize the function of signal transmission.
  • the smart reflective surface 102 has a plurality of reflective array elements (shown schematically as a plurality of black solid rectangles in the figure), under the control of the control circuit (not shown in the figure), each element can be reasonably adjusted according to the corresponding reflection parameters.
  • the phase (and optionally the amplitude) of the signal reflected by the reflector elements is adjusted to achieve the effect of beamforming.
  • FIG. 2 shows an example scenario suitable for applying smart reflective surfaces.
  • the line-of-sight transmission condition that is, the Line of Sight (LOS)
  • LOS Line of Sight
  • NLOS non line of sight
  • an intelligent reflecting surface IRS can be arranged on the building 201 between the BS and the UE, and the phase of the reflected signal (and optionally adjusted by the characteristics of the reflecting array elements of the IRS can be adjusted reasonably) amplitude) to concentrate the signal energy in the direction of the UE, thereby effectively improving the signal-to-noise ratio at the receiving end.
  • a transmitter-smart reflector-receiver link can be added on the basis of the original transmitter-receiver link.
  • These two links They can be used simultaneously to increase data rates and improve the effectiveness of the communication system (such as in the example shown in Figure 2), and as backup links to each other to increase the reliability of the wireless communication system. Therefore, such smart reflector-assisted wireless communication systems have attracted extensive attention of researchers.
  • an intelligent reflector multiple-input multiple-output (IRS-MIMO) system is formed. Similar to a general multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system, in an IRS-MIMO system, channel estimation and precoding based on the channel estimation are also required to eliminate inter-user interference and improve the effectiveness of the communication system.
  • MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
  • the inventor proposes an inventive concept for channel integration, which integrates the channel reorganization in the smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system into a plurality of integrated sub-channels independent of reflection parameters, and uses these integrated sub-channels to communicate with each other.
  • the reflection parameters of the IRS together represent the entire equivalent channel.
  • Such integrated sub-channels can be used for channel estimation and correspondingly applied to precoding, which channel integration will be outlined next with reference to FIG. 3 .
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining an equivalent channel in a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system.
  • the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 3 includes a first communication device BS, a second communication device UE, and an intelligent reflective surface IRS disposed on a building therebetween.
  • the smart reflective surface IRS may include M reflective units (M being a natural number greater than 1), which are received from the BS based on, for example, via a control link shown in dashed lines, under the control of a control circuit (not shown) of the IRS
  • the control information about the reflection parameters is adjusted according to the corresponding M reflection parameters in amplitude and/or phase of the signal sent by the BS to emit a reflection signal that can be received by the UE.
  • the first communication device is shown as a base station, it may also be any network-side device such as a TRP or the like.
  • the case of the equivalent channel will be described by taking the case where the IRS only performs phase adjustment (that is, the amplitude adjustment coefficient in the reflection parameter is 1).
  • the example described based on the phase adjustment can be appropriately applied to the case where the amplitude adjustment is performed at the same time, and the corresponding description will be made later when necessary.
  • the equivalent channel He eq ( ⁇ ) includes a first link H 0 ("direct link") from the BS to the UE and a second link H r from the BS to the UE via the IRS ⁇ H t ("reflection link").
  • H t represents the channel from BS to IRS, which can have the form of an M ⁇ N t matrix, where N t represents the number of antennas of the BS;
  • H r represents the channel from IRS to UE, which can have N In the form of an r ⁇ M matrix, where N r represents the number of antennas of the UE.
  • the inventor proposes the inventive concept of the present disclosure: recombining and integrating the channel H 0 from the BS to the UE, the channel H t from the BS to the IRS, and the channel H r from the IRS to the UE into multiple integrators independent of reflection parameters channel, and use these integrated subchannels to represent the entire equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the IRS.
  • multiple integrated sub-channels independent of reflection parameters can be solved by performing channel observations with reference signals using different reflection parameters.
  • a precoding matrix can also be calculated based on the integrated subchannels thus solved.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a first configuration example of the electronic device according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the electronic device 400 may include an acquisition unit 410 and a determination unit 420 .
  • each unit of the electronic device 400 may be included in the processing circuit.
  • the electronic device 400 may include either one processing circuit or multiple processing circuits.
  • the processing circuit may include various discrete functional units to perform various different functions and/or operations. It should be noted that these functional units may be physical entities or logical entities, and units with different names may be implemented by the same physical entity.
  • the electronic device 400 shown in FIG. 4 may be applied to a wireless communication system assisted by a smart reflective surface such as that described with reference to FIG. 3 in ⁇ 1. Overview>.
  • the processing implemented by the electronic device 400 and its functional units will continue to be described in conjunction with the example of FIG. 3 .
  • the obtaining unit 410 of the electronic device 400 may obtain a plurality of channel information about an equivalent channel between the first communication device and the second communication device obtained through multiple channel measurements.
  • the second communication device uses a corresponding set of reflection parameters to reflect the The reflected signal sent from the reference signal is used to obtain a channel information of the equivalent channel.
  • the determining unit 420 of the electronic device 400 can determine the equivalent channel (with the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface) by jointly processing the multiple sets of reflection parameters used in the multiple channel measurements and the acquired multiple channel information. reflection parameter independent) channel estimation of multiple integrated sub-channels.
  • the first communication device may be the network side device BS shown in FIG. 3
  • the second communication device may be the user equipment UE shown in FIG. 3
  • the following description mainly takes the first communication device being the network side device BS and the second communication device being the user equipment UE as an example for description, but on the basis of the present disclosure, different settings may be appropriately adopted.
  • the first communication device may be the user equipment and the second communication device may be the network side device, which will not be repeated here.
  • the smart reflective surface between the first communication device and the second communication device may be, for example, the smart reflective surface IRS shown in FIG. 3 with M reflective units.
  • L is a natural number greater than 1 and is properly set
  • the reflected signal received by the second communication device is, for example, the reflection units of the smart reflection surface in their own
  • the function of determining these reflection parameters may be implemented by the determining unit 420 of the electronic device 400 .
  • FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of such a determination unit 420, wherein the determination unit 420 includes an optional reflection parameter determination module 421 and a channel estimation determination module 422, the function of which is first described here.
  • the reflection parameter determination module 421 may be configured to determine the reflection parameters of the intelligent reflection surface used in each measurement, so that the intelligent reflection surface reflects the reference signal according to the corresponding reflection parameter.
  • the electronic device 400 may directly or indirectly provide control information on reflection parameters (eg, information including reflection parameters) to the smart reflection surface via an unshown transmitting unit.
  • the electronic device 400 may send control information about the reflection parameter to a first communication device such as a network-side device, so that the first communication device sends the corresponding control information to the smart reflection surface (eg, simultaneously with the reference signal) through the control link , so that the smart reflective surface reflects the reference signal according to the reflection parameter indicated by the control information.
  • the electronic device 400 may directly send the control information about the reflection parameters to the smart reflective surface at one time for subsequent use by the smart reflective surface in each reflection.
  • the intelligent reflection surface may use the form of the diagonal element in the reflection matrix ⁇ with equation (1) , the lth group of M reflection parameters.
  • Each reflection parameter may be appropriately set by the reflection parameter determination module 421 .
  • the reflection parameter determination module 421 may randomly generate the reflection parameters in the reflection matrix, that is, in equation (1)
  • the value of ⁇ m can be a random number.
  • the corresponding processing of the electronic device 400 will be described mainly by taking the case where the smart reflective surface only performs phase adjustment (the modulus length of the reflection parameter is 1, that is, the amplitude adjustment coefficient is 1). The example described based on the phase adjustment can be appropriately applied to the case of simultaneous amplitude adjustment, which will be described accordingly later when necessary.
  • the equivalent channel between the first communication device and the second communication device may include a channel from the first communication device to the second communication device.
  • a first link (“direct link") and a second link (“reflective link”) from the first communication device to the second communication device via the smart reflective surface.
  • the reference signal sent by the first communication device BS may be, for example, a channel status indicator-reference signal (Channel Status Indicator-Reference Signal, CSI-RS) or the like.
  • the second communication device UE may be based on the reference signals it receives to reach the UE via the direct link and the reflected link (ie, the reference signals received directly from the BS and received from the IRS, which the IRS sends to the BS according to the lth set of reflection parameters The reflected signal sent after the reference signal is adjusted), channel measurement is performed on the equivalent channel formed by the two links, and channel information of the equivalent channel is obtained.
  • CSI-RS Channel Status Indicator-Reference Signal
  • the inventive concept of channel integration for equivalent channels combines, for example, the channel H 0 from the first communication device BS to the second communication device UE shown in FIG. 3 , the first communication device BS to the smart
  • the channel H t of the reflective surface IRS and the channel H r of the intelligent reflective surface IRS to the second communication device UE are recombined and integrated into a plurality of integrated sub-channels independent of the reflection parameters, and these integrated sub-channels are used together with the reflection parameters of the IRS to represent the entire equivalent channel.
  • the channel estimation determination module 422 of the determination unit 420 of the electronic device 400 may be configured to jointly process multiple sets of reflection parameters used in multiple channel measurements with the acquired multiple channel information , determine the channel estimates of multiple integrated sub-channels (independent of the reflection parameters) that can characterize the equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the smart reflector.
  • the determining unit 420 performs joint processing on the reflection parameters and the channel information through the channel estimation determining module 422, thereby determining channel estimates of multiple integrated sub-channels that can characterize the equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface.
  • the extended reflection vector can be obtained by adding a predetermined constant to the above reflection vector ⁇ .
  • the reflection parameter used does not involve phase adjustment (ie, the reflection parameter has a modulus of 1), so the added predetermined constant is 1.
  • a predetermined constant 1 is set as the first bit in the extended reflection vector, thereby defining an extended reflection vector of the form of the following equation (4)
  • [H r ] (:,m) represents the m-th column of H r
  • [H t ] (m,:) represents the m-th row of H t
  • the integrated subchannel defined in the above manner has a matrix form of N r *N t , where N r represents the number of antennas of the second communication device at the receiving end, and N t represents the number of antennas of the first communication device at the transmitting end.
  • the entire equivalent channel is expressed as the form of multiplying the extended reflection matrix based on the reflection parameter and the cascaded channel composed of the integrated sub-channels independent of the reflection parameter, which is equivalent to multiplying the reflection parameter of the intelligent reflecting surface
  • the relevant channel part is decoupled from the channel part irrelevant to the reflection parameters of the smart reflector, so that the reflection parameters and the observation results of the equivalent channel can be advantageously used to solve the integrated sub-channel independent of the reflection parameters of the smart reflector.
  • the added predetermined constant in Equation (4) sets the first bit of the extended reflection vector, which can actually be added at any of (M+1) positions, as long as the corresponding It is sufficient to adjust the position of H 0 in equation (5) (ie, make sure that the constant added is for multiplying with H 0 in equation (6)).
  • the plurality of channel information obtained by the obtaining unit 410 of the electronic device 400 may include a plurality of channel estimates of the equivalent channel obtained by the second communication device through channel measurement (the channel estimates of the equivalent channel are hereinafter Also called "observation channel").
  • the second communication device UE may be based on the 1 th group generated by, for example, the reflection parameter determination module 421 of the determination unit 420 of the electronic device 400 based on the IRS through the direct link and the reflected link (wherein the IRS applies (reflection parameter) reference signal such as CSI-RS reaching the UE, channel measurement of the equivalent channel is performed, and the observation channel of the equivalent channel can be obtained by various existing methods to provide it to the acquisition unit of the electronic device 400 410.
  • the IRS applies (reflection parameter) reference signal such as CSI-RS reaching the UE
  • the plurality of channel information obtained by the obtaining unit 410 of the electronic device 400 may include a plurality of channel state information of an equivalent channel obtained by the second communication device through channel measurement.
  • the second communication device UE may perform channel measurement of an equivalent channel, and may provide the obtained channel state information to the electronic device in the form of, for example, a channel state information (Channel State Information, CSI) report, etc.
  • the acquisition unit 410 of 400 may be configured to, based on the obtained plurality of channel information, respectively determine a plurality of channel estimates of the equivalent channel, eg, a plurality of observation channels, in an existing manner.
  • the acquisition unit 410 may have a function of performing channel estimation of the equivalent channel based on the channel state information of the equivalent channel or the like in an existing manner.
  • the example joint processing performed by the determining unit 420 of the electronic device 400 may include: Multiplying the inverse matrix of the training matrix constructed by multiple extended reflection vectors obtained by the reflection parameter determination module 421 and applied to the multiple groups of reflection parameters obtained by the reflection parameter determination module 421 and the observation matrix constructed based on the multiple channel estimates (observation channels), to determine the channel matrix of each integrated subchannel.
  • the "inverse matrix" of the training matrix here includes a pseudo-inverse matrix, which will be described in detail later.
  • the channel estimation determination module 422 may, for example, add a predetermined constant to each group of reflection parameters (for example, generated by the reflection parameter determination module 421 and applied to the channel measurement) to obtain the above-mentioned multi-reflection parameters. an extended reflection vector.
  • the smart reflective surface includes M reflective units and uses, for example, a set of M reflective parameters corresponding to the M reflective units generated by the reflective parameter determination module 421 in each reflection (eg, having equation (1) In the form of the diagonal element in ) (M is a natural number greater than 1)
  • the channel estimation determines the extended reflection vector used by the module 422 can have the form of an M+1 dimensional vector in the following equation (4'), i.e.
  • l 1, 2, . . . , L, respectively corresponding to the lth channel measurement in the L channel measurements.
  • Channel estimation determination module 422 may construct a training matrix based on the extended reflection vectors to jointly represent reflection parameters used by multiple channel measurements.
  • a training matrix ⁇ can be formed by taking the L extended reflection vectors in the form of equation (4') as columns respectively:
  • the channel estimation determination module 422 may construct an observation matrix based on the channel estimates (observed channels) of each channel measurement to jointly represent the measurement results of the multiple channel measurements.
  • the channel estimation determining module 422 may use each observation channel obtained by L channel measurements as each row to obtain the following observation matrix A to jointly represent the channel estimates of multiple channel measurements:
  • the channel estimation determination module 422 may multiply the inverse matrix of the training matrix constructed in the above manner with the observation matrix to solve for a plurality of integrated sub-channels independent of the smart reflector. The principle underlying this multiplication process and the details of its implementation will be described next.
  • the extended reflection vector of the form Eq. (4') can be Bring in equation (6) representing the equivalent channel, while taking into account the influence of noise, to convert the equivalent channel acquired by the acquisition unit 410
  • the channel estimation of is expressed as the following observation channel
  • Z l is the noise of the second communication device at the receiving end.
  • each integrated subchannel can be simply represented as a channel matrix of N r *N t , where N r represents the number of antennas of the second communication device, and N t represents the number of antennas of the first communication device.
  • the channel estimation determination module 422 may left-multiply both sides of the equation by the pseudo-inverse matrix ( ⁇ * ⁇ T ) ⁇ 1 ⁇ * of the training matrix ⁇ , respectively, ie, multiply the (pseudo)
  • the inverse matrix is multiplied by the observation matrix A, and the channel estimation of each integrated subchannel can be obtained:
  • the number of channel measurements or the number of groups L of reflection parameters is set to be greater than or equal to the number of integrated sub-channels M+1. It can be understood that in order to solve the M+1 integrated sub-channels, L ⁇ M+1 measurement results need to be obtained.
  • the training matrix ⁇ itself is not necessarily a square matrix
  • a pseudo-inverse matrix ( ⁇ * ⁇ T ) ⁇ 1 ⁇ * is used for the matrix multiplication operation. To ensure the existence of the pseudo-inverse of the training matrix ⁇ , the product ( ⁇ * ⁇ T ) of its conjugate transposed matrix ⁇ * and the transposed matrix ⁇ T is required to be invertible.
  • the reflection parameters employed do not involve phase adjustment, so the reflection parameters generated, for example, by reflection parameter determination module 421 have the form of, for example, equation (1), such that the extended reflection vector and training matrix have equation (4') and the form of (7).
  • each reflection parameter in the training matrix of equation (7) also becomes the form with an amplitude adjustment coefficient
  • the predetermined constant of the first row can be any value and is no longer limited to 1.
  • the reflection parameters involve both amplitude and phase adjustment, ie the process of solving for the integrated subchannels by equations (8)-(12) will also apply.
  • the channel estimation determination module 422 of the determination unit 420 may construct a training matrix using multiple extended reflection vectors obtained based on multiple sets of reflection parameters (eg, generated by the reflection parameter determination module 421 and applied to channel measurements),
  • the inverse matrix of the training matrix (including the pseudo-inverse matrix) is multiplied by the observation matrix constructed based on multiple channel estimates (observed channels), so as to determine the channel matrix of each integrated sub-channel.
  • the integrated sub-channel thus determined is independent of the reflection parameters of the smart reflector, and can be advantageously used for various subsequent processing such as precoding, etc., which will be described in detail later in the second embodiment.
  • the training matrix can be constructed using the reflection parameters, and the inverse matrix (pseudo-inverse matrix) of the training matrix can be constructed. It is sufficient to multiply the observation matrix constructed based on multiple channel estimates (observation channels) to obtain equivalent sub-channels.
  • the smart reflector uses a set of M reflection parameters corresponding to the M reflection units it includes in each channel measurement. These reflection parameters may be determined using the optional reflection parameter determination module 421 included in the determination unit 420 of the electronic device 400, and the electronic device 400 may appropriately provide control information on the reflection parameters to the smart reflection surface.
  • the reflection parameter determination module 421 can uniformly determine the L groups of reflection parameters that meet the above requirements, so that the intelligent reflection surface can be used in L ⁇ M+1 channel measurements.
  • the reflection parameter determination module 421 may adopt a heuristic design for the training matrix ⁇ .
  • the lth column in the above-mentioned training matrix ⁇ is equivalent to the lth extended reflection vector, and the reflection parameter determination module 421 may determine the second to M+1 matrix elements of this column as the M reflection parameters to be used in the lth channel measurement. .
  • the reflection parameter determination module 421 may, for example, also adopt a Hadamard matrix (Hadamard matrix) design for the training matrix ⁇ .
  • the values of the M reflection parameters used in each reflection may be selected from the M matrix elements except the first row among the matrix elements of the L-order Hadamard matrix.
  • the Hadamard matrix can be constructed as follows:
  • an example method for the reflection parameter determination module 421 to determine the training matrix ⁇ based on GL is to take the first row of GL as the first row of ⁇ and divide the first row by GL Any other M rows other than ⁇ are taken as the second row to the M+1th row of ⁇ .
  • the reflection parameter determination module 421 may adopt a discrete Fourier transform (Discrete Fourier transform, DFT) design for the training matrix ⁇ .
  • DFT discrete Fourier transform
  • the values of the M reflection parameters used in each reflection may be selected from M matrix elements except the first row among the matrix elements of the L-order discrete Fourier transform matrix.
  • An example method for the reflection parameter determination module 421 to determine the training matrix ⁇ based on FL is to use the first row of FL as the first row of ⁇ , and use any M rows other than the first row of FL as the second row of ⁇ . line to line M+1.
  • the channel H 0 from the BS to the UE, the channel H t from the BS to the IRS, and the channel H r from the IRS to the UE, such as the channel H 0 from the BS to the UE, the channel H t from the BS to the UE, and the channel H r from the IRS to the UE, as shown in FIG. ) is obtained based on H 0 , H t and H r .
  • Simulation results show that various schemes that conform to the design principle of (M+1) ⁇ L training matrix ⁇ (L ⁇ M+1 and ⁇ row is full rank) can achieve good estimation performance.
  • the MSE between the estimated value of the integrated sub-channel and the true value is very small (no more than -70 dB) under the transmit power constraint of 0 to 20 dBm, which shows that the proposed sub-channel estimation method is feasible.
  • the MSE of the heuristic design based on Equation (13) drops from about -92dB to about -102dB, which is lower than the MSE of the random design (from about -78dB to about - 85dB), while the MSE for both the Hadamard matrix-based design based on equation (14) and the DFT matrix-based design based on equation (15) decreased from about -110dB to about -130dB, i.e., the performance was the best. OK.
  • the reason for the excellent performance of these two designs is that both the DFT matrix and the Hadamard matrix are unitary matrices, and there is no problem of amplifying noise when performing the operation in Equation (12).
  • reflection parameters used in channel measurements are given above.
  • those skilled in the art can make appropriate modifications and deformations, as long as a training matrix can be constructed using each set of reflection parameters, and an inverse matrix (pseudo-inverse matrix) of such a training matrix can be obtained, which can be used jointly based on multiple
  • the observation matrix constructed by the channel estimation (observation channel) may be processed together to obtain equivalent subchannels.
  • the determining unit further Channels H 0 such as the first communication device BS to the second communication device UE, the first communication device BS to the intelligent reflective surface IRS (which has a The channel H t of the reflection matrix ⁇ )) and the channel H r of the intelligent reflection surface IRS to the second communication device UE.
  • the channels shown in FIG. 3 may be simply referred to as direct channel H 0 , incident channel H t , reflected channel H r , respectively, and collectively referred to as full channels.
  • the first link H 0 (“direct link") from the BS to the UE is formed via the direct channel H 0 , and via the incident channel H t , the channel H of the intelligent reflector IRS (with reflection matrix ⁇ ) t constitutes a second link H r ⁇ H t ("reflective link”) from the BS to the UE via the IRS.
  • equation (5) is transformed into the following form
  • the smart reflector IRS ie, the previously described reflection matrix ⁇
  • the determining unit may determine a channel matrix representing one integrated sub-channel H 0 of the first link as the first channel matrix from the first communication device BS to the second communication device UE Channel matrix of channel (direct channel) H 0 .
  • the channel matrix of the two channels (incident channels) H t and based on the eigenvectors of the channel matrix of the M integrated sub-channels H
  • H m element [H m ] (1,1 ) at position (1,1) of the channel matrix.
  • the product of the above-mentioned diagonal matrix as the bias and the matrix B can be taken as the incident channel H t , as shown in the following equation (5-2).
  • each complete channel ie, the direct channel H 0 , the incident channel H t , and the reflected channel H r
  • each complete channel recovered based on the integrated sub-channel can be applied to various processing similar to the channel obtained by the existing measurement method (eg, direct measurement, etc.), which will not be repeated here.
  • the estimated reflected link as an estimate of the "reflected link" H r ⁇ H t Not equal to the reflection link H t ⁇ H t .
  • the multiplier ambiguity that is, the influence caused by the diagonal matrix of mathematical formulas (5-5) and (5-6), that is, to eliminate the following mathematical formula (5-9) expression
  • the diagonal element r 1,m t m,1 representing the multiplier blur in the mathematical formula (5-9) is exactly the element of the sub-channel H m at the position (1, 1), so in the construction and After that, the diagonal matrix represented by the mathematical formula (5-9) can be used as an offset (that is, the diagonal matrix in the above-mentioned formula (5-2)), for example, with Multiply to remove the effects of multiplier blur.
  • the estimated reflection channel constructed in the above manner can be As the reflection channel H r , using the diagonal matrix represented by the equation (5-9) as an offset, for example, the estimated incident channel constructed in the above-mentioned manner Multiplied as the incident channel H t , that is, the reflected channel H r and the incident channel H t obtained by the restoration processing of the determination unit in this supplementary example are obtained.
  • the above describes the first configuration example of the electronic device of the first embodiment of the present disclosure and the connection with the smart reflective surface that can be used in the embodiment of the present disclosure for the wireless communication system assisted by the smart reflective surface such as that shown in FIG. 3 .
  • Examples of integrated sub-channels that are independent of reflection parameters, and further in conjunction with examples of such integrated sub-channels, describe examples of processing performed by various units in an electronic device or examples of information/data/parameters involved in the processing.
  • the first configuration example of the present embodiment it is possible to obtain channel estimates of integrated sub-channels based on multiple channel measurements with reference signals using multiple sets of reflection parameters.
  • the obtained channel estimates of the integrated sub-channels can be advantageously used for various subsequent processing, such as precoding, etc., which will be described in detail later in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a second configuration example of the electronic device according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the second configuration example shown in FIG. 6 relates to the case where the first configuration example shown in FIG. 4 is implemented in the first communication device, that is, the example in which the electronic device shown in FIG. 4 is included in the first communication device, therefore, The following description will be made on the basis of the first configuration example shown in FIG. 4 above.
  • the electronic device 600 may include an acquisition unit 610 and a determination unit 620 , which are respectively similar to the acquisition unit 410 and the determination unit 420 in the electronic device 400 of FIG. 4 .
  • the electronic device 600 additionally includes a sending unit 630, which is configured to send a reference signal to the second communication device and the smart reflective surface.
  • the reference signal sent by the sending unit 630 may be, for example, CSI-RS, etc., for the second communication device UE shown in FIG.
  • the reference signal it receives and reaches the UE through the direct link and the reflected link (that is, the reference signal received directly from the BS and the reflected signal received from the IRS and sent by the IRS after adjusting the reference signal sent by the BS according to the reflection parameters. ), perform channel measurement on the equivalent channel formed by the two links, and obtain channel information of the equivalent channel.
  • the obtaining unit 610 may, for example, directly receive information about the electronic device 600 serving as the first communication device and the second communication device obtained via multiple channel measurements on the reference channel sent by the sending unit 630 directly from the second communication device. Multiple channel information of the equivalent channel between.
  • each received channel information may be directly a channel estimation of an equivalent channel, or may be channel state information of an equivalent channel obtained by a second communication device (for example, the second communication device UE shown in FIG. Channel state information returned by CSI reporting).
  • the obtaining unit 610 may be configured to, based on the obtained plurality of channel information, respectively determine a plurality of channel estimates of an equivalent channel, eg, a plurality of observation channels, in an existing manner.
  • the determining unit 620 may, in a manner similar to the determining unit 420 in the electronic device 400 of FIG. 4, jointly process the multiple sets of reflection parameters used in the multiple channel measurements and the multiple acquired channel information, and determine whether the signal can be correlated with the intelligence.
  • the reflection parameters of the reflection surface together represent the channel estimation of multiple integrated sub-channels of the equivalent channel (independent of the reflection parameters), which will not be repeated here.
  • the determination unit 620 may have an example configuration similar to that of the determination unit 420 shown in FIG. 5 , that is, may include an optional reflection parameter determination module and a channel estimation determination module (not shown).
  • the determination unit 620 of the electronic device 600 as the first communication device may determine the reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface used in each measurement using the reflection parameter determination module, and may generate control information about the reflection parameter.
  • the electronic device 600 may send the control information to the smart reflective surface through the control link, for example, simultaneously with the reference signal through the sending unit 610, so that the smart reflective surface reflects the reference signal according to the corresponding reflection parameter.
  • the control link for transmitting the control information between the electronic device 600 as the first communication device and the smart reflective surface can be implemented in various prior art ways, which are not limited here.
  • the first communication device as the transmitting end has the functions of the acquisition unit and the determination unit of the electronic device described in the first configuration example, and also has the function of communicating with the second The functionality of the device and the smart reflective surface to send reference signals and optionally control information about the reflective parameters directly to the smart reflective surface. In this way, it is possible to avoid additionally disposing an electronic device for integrating the channel estimation of the sub-channels, thereby simplifying the system design.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a third configuration example of the electronic device according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the third configuration example shown in FIG. 7 relates to the case where the first configuration example shown in FIG. 4 is implemented in the second communication device, that is, the example in which the electronic device shown in FIG. 4 is included in the second communication device, therefore, The following description will be made on the basis of the first configuration example shown in FIG. 4 above.
  • the electronic device 700 may include an acquisition unit 710 and a determination unit 720 , which are respectively similar to the acquisition unit 710 and the determination unit 720 in the electronic device 400 of FIG. 4 . Furthermore, the electronic device 700 additionally includes a receiving unit 730 configured to receive a reference signal from the first communication device.
  • the reference signal received by the receiving unit 730 may be, for example, CSI-RS or the like.
  • the obtaining unit 710 is based on the reference signals received by the receiving unit 730 and arriving at the UE through the direct link and the reflected link (ie, the reference signals received directly from the BS and the reference signals received from the IRS and sent by the IRS to the BS according to the reflection parameters.
  • the reflected signal sent after the adjustment is performed) channel measurement is performed on the equivalent channel formed by the two links, and the channel information of the equivalent channel is obtained.
  • the channel information obtained by the obtaining unit 710 by measuring the equivalent channel may be the channel estimation (observed channel) of the equivalent channel determined by the existing method.
  • the determination unit 720 of the electronic device 700 may, in a manner similar to the determination unit 420 in the electronic device 400 of FIG. 4 , jointly process multiple sets of reflection parameters used in multiple channel measurements and the acquired multiple channel information, The channel estimates of multiple integrated sub-channels (independent of the reflection parameters) that can characterize the equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the smart reflector are determined, which will not be repeated here.
  • the determination unit 720 may have an example configuration similar to that of the determination unit 420 shown in FIG. 5 , that is, may include an optional reflection parameter determination module and a channel estimation determination module (not shown).
  • the determination unit 720 of the electronic device 700 as the second communication device may determine the reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface used in each measurement using the reflection parameter determination module, and may generate control information about the reflection parameter.
  • the electronic device 700 can send the control information to the first communication device at one time through an unshown sending unit, so that the first communication device can send the control information to the smart reflective surface via the control link, for example, at the same time as the reference signal, so that the smart reflector
  • the reflective surface reflects the reference signal according to the corresponding reflection parameter.
  • the electronic device 700 may directly send the control information about the reflection parameters to the smart reflective surface at one time, for the smart reflective surface to use in each subsequent reflection.
  • the third configuration example of the electronic device of the first embodiment of the present disclosure has been described above with respect to the smart reflective surface-assisted wireless communication system such as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the second communication device serving as the receiving end has the functions of the acquiring unit and the determining unit of the electronic device described in the first configuration example, and also has the functions of the receiving unit and the determining unit of the electronic device described in the first configuration example The capability of the device to receive reference signals. In this way, it is possible to avoid additionally disposing an electronic device for integrating the channel estimation of the sub-channels, thereby simplifying the system design.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an information interaction flow according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an electronic device 600 such as described with reference to FIG. 6 is used as the first communication device, and it adopts the form of a network side device BS; the user equipment UE is used as the second communication device; an intelligent device is set between the BS and the US
  • the reflective surface IRS ie, each device has the relationship shown in FIG. 3 , for example. Note that although the interaction between the BS and the UE is described here as the first and second communication devices as an example, it should be understood that the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • step S800 the BS determines L groups of reflection parameters to be used in L channel measurements.
  • step S810-1 the BS sends a reference signal to the UE and the IRS, and at the same time, in step S820-1, for example, via a control link, sends the control information about the reflection parameters of the first group to the IRS, so that the IRS according to the received
  • the reflection parameter reflects the reference signal.
  • the UE receiving the reference signal from the BS and the reflected signal from the IRS obtains the 1 st channel information of the equivalent channel by appropriate channel measurements (e.g. in a prior art manner).
  • step S830-1 the BS acquires the first channel information from the UE.
  • steps S810-1, S820-1, and S830-1 may be collectively referred to as the first channel measurement. Repeat the channel measurement multiple times in this way until the predetermined L channel measurements are completed (at each subsequent step of each channel measurement, such as steps S810-2, S820-2, S830-2...S810-L, S820- L, S830-L performs similar processing as in the first channel measurement).
  • step S840 the BS performs joint processing on the L groups of reflection parameters used in the L channel measurements and the acquired L channel information, to determine (and the reflection parameters) that can characterize the equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the IRS. unrelated) channel estimation of multiple integrated sub-channels.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of an information interaction flow according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the network side device BS is used as the first communication device; the electronic device 700 such as described with reference to FIG. 7 is used as the second communication device, and it adopts the form of user equipment UE; a smart device is set between the BS and the US Reflector IRS.
  • the interaction between the BS and the UE is described here as the first and second communication devices as an example, it should be understood that the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • step S900 the UE, which is the second communication device, determines L groups of reflection parameters to be used in L channel measurements, and optionally, in step S910, sends control information about the reflection parameters to the first communication Equipment BS.
  • the BS sends a reference signal to the UE and the IRS, and at the same time sends control information about the 1st set of reflection parameters to the IRS, eg via a control link, so that the IRS reflects the reference signal according to the received reflection parameters.
  • step S920-1 the UE that has received the reference signal from the BS and the reflected signal from the IRS acquires the first channel information of the equivalent channel through appropriate channel measurement (eg, in a prior art manner).
  • step S910 (excluding the step S910 itself) to the step S920-1 may be collectively referred to as the first channel measurement. Repeat the channel measurement multiple times in this way until the predetermined L channel measurements are completed (in the respective steps of each channel measurement such as steps S910-2, . similar treatment).
  • step S930 the UE performs joint processing on the L groups of reflection parameters used in the L channel measurements and the acquired L pieces of channel information, to determine (and the reflection parameters) that can characterize the equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the IRS. unrelated) channel estimation of multiple integrated sub-channels.
  • the positions of the BS and the UE in FIG. 8 may be interchanged. That is, a UE having a configuration such as the electronic device 600 described with reference to FIG. 6 may be used as a transmitting end, and a BS may be used as a receiving end, and the first communication device may be performed by the UE having a configuration such as the electronic device 600 described with reference to FIG. 6 .
  • the processing of the second communication device is performed by the BS.
  • the positions of the BS and the UE in FIG. 9 can be interchanged. That is, the UE may be used as a transmitting end, and a BS having a configuration such as the electronic device 700 described with reference to FIG. 7 may be used as a receiving end, and the processing of the first communication device may be performed by the UE, with a configuration such as the electronic device 700 described with reference to FIG. 7 .
  • the configured BS performs the processing of the second communication device.
  • the process of determining the reflection parameter such as step S900 and the process of determining the channel estimate of the integrated subchannel, such as step S930 , may be implemented by an electronic device 400 not shown, such as that described with reference to FIG. 4 . , and perform necessary information exchange with the BS and UE shown in FIG. 9 (eg, provide the BS with control information about the reflection parameters in step S910, additionally obtain L channels of equivalent channels from the UE after step S920-L) information), which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a first configuration example of the electronic device according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the electronic device 1000 may include a first computing unit 1010 and a second computing unit 1020 .
  • the electronic device 1000 may be based on multiple integrations obtained using, for example, any of the electronic device 400, the electronic device 600, and the electronic device 700 described above with reference to FIGS.
  • the reflection parameters that can be used for the smart reflector and the precoding matrix that can be used to precode the data signal of the first communication device are calculated.
  • each unit of the electronic device 1000 may be included in the processing circuit.
  • the electronic device 1000 may include either one processing circuit or multiple processing circuits.
  • the processing circuit may include various discrete functional units to perform various different functions and/or operations. It should be noted that these functional units may be physical entities or logical entities, and units with different names may be implemented by the same physical entity.
  • the first calculation unit 1010 of the electronic device 1000 may calculate the first precoding matrix using, for example, the channel estimates of the plurality of integrated sub-channels obtained by any of the electronic devices 400, 600 and 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7 . .
  • the inventive concept of channel reorganization and integration proposed by the inventor can reorganize and integrate the channel reorganization between the first communication device and the second communication device in the wireless communication system assisted by the smart reflector as shown in FIG. 3 into and reflect Multiple integrated sub-channels independent of parameters, and use these integrated sub-channels to represent the entire equivalent channel together with the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface. Therefore, when calculating the precoding matrix for the data signal of the first communication device, the electronic device 1000 can ignore the influence of the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface, and firstly integrate the multiple The subchannels are regarded as valid channels in the sense of precoding, and a first precoding matrix is calculated based on the channel estimates of these integrated subchannels.
  • the first calculation unit 1010 may calculate the first precoding matrix based on the channel estimates of the integrated sub-channels using various existing methods, so that the system performance may be optimized.
  • the first precoding matrix may be determined by maximizing the equivalent channel capacity of a plurality of integrated subchannels after precoding the data signal to be transmitted with the first precoding matrix.
  • the second calculation unit 1020 of the electronic device 1000 may calculate the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device (for the first precoding matrix calculated by the first calculation unit 1010 in the above manner). precoding matrix of the data signal of the communication device) such that the equivalent precoding matrix generated based on the calculated reflection coefficients and the second precoding matrix is similar to the first precoding matrix.
  • the reflection parameters calculated by the second calculation unit 1020 may include, for example, amplitude adjustment parameters and/or phase adjustment parameters for performing amplitude adjustment of the signal by each reflection unit of the smart reflective surface.
  • the electronic device 1000 can be used to generate an equivalent precoding matrix based on the undetermined reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the undetermined second precoding matrix of the first communication device, and the generated equivalent precoding matrix and the first precoding matrix can be generated.
  • the coding matrices are similar, the values of the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device are determined.
  • the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device determined by the second calculation unit 1020 in the above manner may approximately represent, for example, the first precoding matrix capable of maximizing the equivalent channel capacity. Therefore, when the above reflection parameters and the second precoding matrix are respectively applied to the wireless communication system assisted by the smart reflection surface shown in FIG. 3 , the effect of maximizing the equivalent channel capacity can also be obtained. In other words, for example, after calculating a first precoding matrix that can optimize system performance based on channel estimates of integrated subchannels using various existing methods, the reflection parameters and the second precoding matrix that can approximately represent the first precoding matrix can make The system performance of the smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system is similarly optimized.
  • the first communication device BS The adopted precoding matrix (the second precoding matrix of the first communication device) is W (W is an N t ⁇ N s -dimensional matrix, N t represents the number of antennas of the first communication device, and N s represents the number of information streams) , and the transmit power is ⁇ .
  • y d and y r can be expressed as follows, respectively
  • ⁇ is an M ⁇ M diagonal matrix, representing the amplitude and/or phase adjustment of the reflected signals of the M reflection units of the IRS, respectively.
  • the reflection unit of the IRS will only perform phase adjustment as an example for description, so the diagonal matrix ⁇ takes the form of equation (1) previously described in ⁇ 1.
  • the symbols received by the second communication device UE can be expressed as follows:
  • the precoding performance is usually measured by the equivalent channel capacity after precoding.
  • the equivalent channel capacity after precoding can be expressed as follows:
  • N r is an identity matrix of order N r
  • ⁇ 2 is the noise power
  • N r represents the number of antennas of the second communication device UE.
  • the purpose of various processing performed by the first computing unit 1010 and the second computing unit 1020 of the electronic device 1000 is based on, for example, the data obtained by any one of the electronic devices 400 , 600 and 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7 . Integrate the channel estimates of the sub-channels, calculate the reflection parameter ( ⁇ ) of the smart reflector and the second precoding matrix (W) of the first communication device, so as to maximize the CIRS-MIMO ( ⁇ ,W).
  • the equivalent channel can have the form of equation (6) in the first configuration example of ⁇ 2.
  • Configuration example of the first embodiment> that is, in, is an extended reflection vector obtained by adding a predetermined constant to the set of reflection parameters used by the Smart Reflector in a single reflection.
  • the reflection parameter used does not involve phase adjustment (ie, the reflection parameter has a modulus of 1), so the reflection vector is expanded
  • Equation (4) in the first configuration example with ⁇ 2.
  • Configuration example of the first embodiment> form.
  • Heff [H 0 . . . H M ], which can be regarded as an effective channel in the sense of precoding.
  • the first computing unit 1010 of the electronic device 1000 may ignore the influence of the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface, but regard the multiple integrated sub-channels as an effective channel in the sense of precoding, and A channel estimate based on the effective channel (such as the channel estimate described above) ) to calculate the first precoding matrix P 1 .
  • the first precoding matrix P 1 can be used to replace in equation (22)
  • equation (22) the following equation can be obtained
  • the first calculation subunit 1010 may, for example, based on the above equation (23), utilize various conventional precoding schemes by maximizing C Ref (P 1 ) according to the precoding sense constructed based on multiple integrated subchannels.
  • Channel Estimation of Effective Channels Find the precoding matrix
  • an optimum value of the first precoding matrix P1 an example thereof has the form of the following equation (24).
  • the second calculation unit 1020 of the electronic device 1000 may be configured to generate an equivalent representation for approximately representing the first precoding matrix according to the inner product of the extended reflection vector and the second precoding matrix A precoding matrix, wherein the extended reflection vector is obtained by adding a predetermined constant to a set of reflection parameters used by the smart reflective surface in a single reflection.
  • the equivalent precoding matrix P eff generated by the second calculation unit 1020 according to the inner product of the extended reflection vector and the second precoding matrix may have the following form
  • the second precoding matrix W is, for example, an N t ⁇ N s -dimensional matrix, where N t represents the number of antennas of the first communication device at the transmitting end, and N s is the number of information streams of the first communication device.
  • the second calculation unit 1020 may is configured to calculate the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix such that the F-norm between the equivalent precoding matrix generated based on the calculated reflection parameters and the second precoding matrix and the first precoding matrix is the smallest .
  • the second calculation unit 1020 may measure the similarity between the equivalent precoding matrix and the first precoding matrix based on the F norm between them, and determine the generated equivalent precoding matrix when the F norm is the smallest.
  • the coding matrix is most similar to the first precoding matrix, so that the reflection parameters of the intelligent reflecting surface generating the equivalent precoding matrix and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device are determined to be optimal values required.
  • the second calculation unit 1020 may calculate an extended reflection vector satisfying the following equation (26) and the optimal value of the second precoding matrix W
  • the extended reflection vector determined when the F-norm between is minimum and the optimal value of the second precoding matrix W. can be obtained in this way
  • the reflection parameters of the smart reflection surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device are determined.
  • the reflection parameters involve both amplitude and phase adjustment, i.e. the precoding matrix of the first communication device and the smart reflection are determined by equations (16)-(26). The way the reflection parameter of the face will apply similarly.
  • the precoding matrix for the first communication device and the reflection parameters of the smart reflector can be calculated based on the pre-obtained channel estimates of the integrated subchannels, so that The calculated reflection parameters and precoding matrices can be beneficial for optimizing system performance.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a second configuration example of the electronic device according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the second configuration example shown in FIG. 11 is related to a further improvement of the first configuration example shown in FIG. 10 , and therefore, the following description will be made on the basis of the first configuration example shown in FIG. 10 above.
  • the electronic device 1100 may include a first computing unit 1110 and a second computing unit 1120 , which are respectively similar to the first computing unit 1010 and the second computing unit 1020 in the electronic device 1000 of FIG. 10 .
  • the electronic device 1100 additionally includes a precoding unit 1130 configured to precode the data signal of the first communication device using the calculated second precoding matrix.
  • the electronic device 1100 may, for example, be included in a first communication device such as the network-side device BS shown in FIG. 3 . That is, the electronic device 1100 as the first communication device itself calculates the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the precoding matrix of the first communication device.
  • the electronic device 1100 communicates as the first communication device in a system such as that shown in FIG. 3 , it can send the precoding unit 1130 to the smart reflective surface and the second communication device via the unshown sending unit
  • the data signal precoded by the second precoding matrix calculated by the calculation unit 1120 and the reflection parameters calculated by the second calculation unit 1120 are optionally sent to the smart reflective surface via the control link.
  • the electronic device may precode the data signal of the first communication device, and may be included in the first communication device, for example. In this way, utilizing the generated precoding matrix improves the system performance of the smart reflector assisted wireless communication system.
  • the second example configuration of the first embodiment (electronic device 600 shown in FIG. 6 ) and the second example configuration of the second embodiment (electronic device 1100 shown in FIG. 11 ) may be combined, and may be
  • the smart reflective surface-assisted wireless communication system shown in FIG. 3 is used as the first communication device.
  • the device may determine a precoding matrix and reflection parameters after obtaining the channel estimates of the integrated subchannels, and may perform precoding of the data signal to be sent accordingly, optionally sending the precoded data to the smart reflection surface and the second communication device A data signal, while optionally sending the determined reflection parameters to the intelligent reflection surface, eg via a control link.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining an equivalent channel in a wireless communication system assisted by a smart reflector in a specific situation, which shows an example situation in which the direct link is blocked in the system, that is, the first example in the example shown in FIG. 3 1.
  • the wireless communication system includes a first communication device BS, a second communication device UE, and an intelligent reflective surface IRS disposed on a building therebetween.
  • the direct link between the first communication device BS and the second communication device UE is blocked, and the channel line-of-sight of the reflected link is dominant.
  • each sub-channel can be represented by a corresponding array steering vector and processed accordingly, which is beneficial to further simplify the calculation of the precoding matrix of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device BS at the transmitting end, and the second communication device UE at the receiving end can be regarded as a planar antenna array, and based on the steering vectors of each antenna array, in the beam domain
  • the channel H t from the BS to the IRS and the channel H r from the IRS to the UE are represented by the following equation (27) in :
  • ⁇ t and ⁇ r represent the path loss of the corresponding channel (link), respectively.
  • the Indicates that the planar antenna array is in the target communication device relative to the antenna array The steering vector of the direction, which can characterize the phase delay of the plane wave caused by the different positions of the elements of the antenna array.
  • the dimension of is determined by the elements (number of antennas) of the antenna array, where each element can be a complex number with a modulo length 1 and a corresponding phase.
  • the spatial orientation of the target communication device relative to the antenna array may be represented and may be referred to as the azimuth.
  • h, v are natural numbers, and 0 ⁇ h ⁇ N H -1, 0 ⁇ v ⁇ N V -1, D is the spacing between array elements, and ⁇ is the wavelength of the carrier. From the above equation (28), as long as the azimuth angle of the target communication device relative to the antenna array is known The steering vector of the antenna array at this azimuth can be determined
  • the added subscripts M, N t , and N r respectively represent the antenna arrays represented by the steering vector (ie, the respective antenna arrays of the intelligent reflective surface IRS, the first communication device BS at the transmitting end, and the second communication device UE at the receiving end).
  • the number of array elements ie, the number of antennas).
  • the added superscript AOA or AOD indicates that the steering vector is the steering vector of the corresponding antenna array with respect to the angle of departure (AOD) or angle of arrival (AOA), and is the ⁇
  • the added subscript t or r indicates the channel to which it belongs (ie, the channel H t on the transmitting side or the channel H r on the receiving side).
  • the first steering vector Indicates the arrival angle of the smart reflective surface IRS at the first communication device BS relative to the smart reflective surface IRS the steering vector of the direction (hereinafter also referred to as the first steering vector); Indicates the departure angle of the smart reflective surface IRS at the second communication device UE relative to the smart reflective surface IRS the steering vector of the direction (hereinafter also referred to as the second steering vector); Indicates the departure angle of the first communication device BS on the intelligent reflective surface IRS relative to the first communication device BS the steering vector of the direction (hereinafter also referred to as the third steering vector); Indicates the angle of arrival of the second communication device UE on the intelligent reflective surface IRS relative to the second communication device UE The steering vector of the direction (hereinafter also referred to as the fourth steering vector).
  • Equation (27) the channels in the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 12 are expressed in the form of Equation (27).
  • equation (5) degenerates into the following form (5′):
  • Equation (27) Bringing Equation (27) into Equation (5'), the expression of the integrated sub-channel H m at this time can be obtained as follows:
  • a second steering vector representing the departure angle direction of the smart reflective surface in the second communication device relative to the smart reflective surface the conjugate transpose of The mth element of , c m represents the first steering vector of the smart reflective surface in the direction of the arrival angle of the first communication device relative to the smart reflective surface the mth element of .
  • processing performed by various units of the electronic device 1000 of the second embodiment such as described above with reference to FIG. to calculate the first precoding matrix P 1 that maximizes the equivalent channel capacity, and then based on the extended reflection vector Inner product with the second precoding matrix W for the first communication device
  • An equivalent precoding matrix for approximately representing the first precoding matrix is generated. For example, when the F-norm between the equivalent precoding matrix and the first precoding matrix P 1 is the smallest, the extended reflection vector may be determined and the optimal value of the second precoding matrix W, and further determine the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the precoding matrix of the first communication device.
  • the above manner of determining the reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface and the precoding matrix of the first communication device is also applicable to the specific situation concerned in this embodiment, such as shown in FIG. 12 . Also, since there is no direct link between the first and second communication devices in this particular case (ie, H 0 ⁇ 0 in the example of FIG. 3 ), the above equation (22)
  • the extended reflection vector can be degenerated into a reflection vector ⁇
  • the precoding matrix W of the first communication device can be degenerated into a precoding vector w
  • the first precoding matrix P 1 can be degenerated into a first precoding vector p 1 .
  • the way of calculating the precoding matrix in the second embodiment would be to first find the first precoding vector p 1 that maximizes the equivalent channel capacity, and then calculate the first precoding vector p 1 that can approximate represents the precoding design ( ⁇ , w) of the first precoding vector.
  • the object to be solved since the object to be solved has become the first precoding vector p 1 (instead of a matrix), it can be solved according to the singular value decomposition (SVD)
  • the precoding criteria design a first precoding vector that maximizes C Ref (p 1 ).
  • the optimal value of the first precoding vector p 1 that maximizes C Ref (p 1 ) under the SVD precoding criterion as follows:
  • the equivalent precoding can be generated according to the inner product of the reflection vector and the first precoding vector of the smart reflection surface vector to approximately represent the first precoding vector, and when the generated equivalent precoding vector is most similar to the first precoding vector, determine the value of the reflection vector for generating the equivalent precoding vector and the second precoding vector value is the desired optimal value.
  • the equivalent precoding vector peff generated from the inner product of the reflection vector ⁇ and the second precoding vector w may have the following form (25′) modified from equation (25)
  • the equivalent precoding vector p eff and the first precoding vector (the optimal value of the first precoding vector)
  • the F-norm between them measures the similarity between them, and when the F-norm is the smallest, the values of the reflection vector ⁇ and the second precoding vector w are determined to be optimal values required. For example, an optimal value that satisfies the following equation (26') as a modification of equation (26) can be calculated
  • ( ⁇ opt , w opt ) represents the determined optimal values of ⁇ and w when the above-mentioned F-norm is the smallest.
  • ⁇ opt represents the feasible region of the IRS-MIMO precoding design, and is used to specify the constraints that ⁇ and w should satisfy
  • ⁇ F represents the F norm (Frobenius norm).
  • the Hadamard product of the transposition of the second steering vector and the conjugate transposition of the first steering vector can be taken as the optimal value ⁇ opt of the reflection vector of the smart reflective surface (that is, the elements of the optimal value vector are taken as reflection parameters).
  • the third steering vector of the first communication device BS in the direction of departure angle of the first communication device BS at the intelligent reflective surface IRS with respect to the first communication device BS Divide by the number of antennas N t of the first communication device as the optimal value w opt of the calculated precoding vector.
  • the reflection vector ⁇ is an intermediate variable, even if the reflection vector ⁇ is modified to cover the amplitude adjustment (the modulo of each element is not 1 but with a pending amplitude adjustment coefficient), the Does not affect the calculation of equations (37) and (38). That is, the above algorithm can be applied without adjustment to the case where the reflection parameters include the amplitude adjustment coefficient and the phase adjustment coefficient.
  • the inventor proposes the electronic device of the third embodiment, which can be based on the corresponding antenna array (the first communication device, the second communication device or the smart reflector) at the departure angle of the target communication device relative to the antenna array /The steering vector in the direction of the angle of arrival calculates the precoding vector of the first communication device and the reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface.
  • the electronic device of the third embodiment can be based on the corresponding antenna array (the first communication device, the second communication device or the smart reflector) at the departure angle of the target communication device relative to the antenna array /The steering vector in the direction of the angle of arrival calculates the precoding vector of the first communication device and the reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a first configuration example of the electronic device according to the third embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the electronic device 1300 may include a reflection calculation unit 1310 and a precoding calculation unit 1320 .
  • each unit of the electronic device 1300 may be included in the processing circuit.
  • the electronic device 1300 may include either one processing circuit or multiple processing circuits.
  • the processing circuit may include various discrete functional units to perform various different functions and/or operations. It should be noted that these functional units may be physical entities or logical entities, and units with different names may be implemented by the same physical entity.
  • the electronic device 1300 shown in FIG. 13 may be applied to a wireless communication system assisted by a smart reflective surface such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 12 .
  • a smart reflective surface such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 12 .
  • the processing implemented by the electronic device 1300 and its functional units will continue to be described in conjunction with the example of FIG. 12 .
  • the reflection calculation unit 1310 of the electronic device 1300 can base on the first steering vector of the smart reflective surface in the direction of the arrival angle of the first communication device relative to the smart reflective surface and the intelligent The second steering vector of the reflecting surface in the direction of departure angle of the second communication device relative to the intelligent reflecting surface, calculate the reflection parameter of the intelligent reflecting surface located between the first communication device and the second communication device, wherein the first communication device and There is no direct link between the second communication devices.
  • the reflection parameter calculated by the reflection calculation unit 1310 may include an amplitude parameter and/or a phase parameter for performing phase adjustment on the signal by each reflection unit of the smart reflective surface.
  • the precoding calculation unit 1320 of the electronic device 1300 may calculate the precoding vector of the first communication device based on the third steering vector of the first communication device in the direction of departure angle of the smart reflective surface relative to the first communication device.
  • the first and second communication devices and the smart reflective surface can each use a planar array antenna to send and receive signals.
  • the departure angle or the arrival angle involved in each of the above-mentioned first to third steering vectors involved in the reflection calculation unit 1310 and the precoding calculation unit 1320 of the electronic device 1300 includes the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, respectively.
  • the departure or arrival angle on the In other words, each of the first to third steering vectors may be a planar array steering vector based on azimuth angles in both horizontal and vertical directions.
  • the first to third steering vectors may be respectively described above with reference to Equation (27) in [4.1 Precoding calculation without direct link]
  • the reflection calculation unit 1310 may be configured to calculate the product of the second steering vector and the corresponding element of the conjugate of the first steering vector as each reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface. That is, the reflection calculation unit 1310 may calculate each reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface in the manner of the above equation (37).
  • the precoding calculation unit 1320 may be configured to divide the third steering vector by the number of antennas of the first communication device as the calculated precoding vector. That is, the precoding calculation unit 1320 may calculate each precoding vector of the smart reflection surface in the manner of the above equation (38).
  • the first configuration example of the electronic device of the third embodiment of the present disclosure has been described above with respect to the smart reflective surface-assisted wireless communication system such as that shown in FIG. 12 . According to the first configuration example of the electronic device of the present embodiment, it is possible to calculate the precoding vector of the first communication device and the Reflection parameters for smart reflective surfaces.
  • precoding can be performed only by knowing the departure angle and the arrival angle between the first communication device at the transmitting end and the smart reflective surface, and between the smart reflecting surface and the second communication device at the receiving end, which has low computational complexity. Practical operability is very strong. Also, similar to the second embodiment, the calculated precoding vector and reflection parameters may be beneficial for optimizing system performance.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a second configuration example of the electronic device according to the third embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the second configuration example shown in FIG. 14 is related to a further improvement of the first configuration example shown in FIG. 13 , and therefore, the following description will be made on the basis of the first configuration example shown in FIG. 13 above.
  • the electronic device 1400 may include a reflection calculation unit 1410 and a precoding calculation unit 1420 , which are respectively similar to the reflection calculation unit 1310 and the precoding calculation unit 1320 in the electronic device 1300 of FIG. 13 .
  • the electronic device 1400 further includes a precoding unit 1430, which is configured to precode the data signal of the first communication device using the calculated precoding vector.
  • the electronic device 1400 may, for example, be included in a first communication device such as the network side device BS shown in FIG. 12 . That is, the electronic device 1400 as the first communication device itself calculates the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the precoding vector of the first communication device.
  • the electronic device 1400 can transmit the precoding unit 1430 to the smart reflective surface and the second communication device via the unshown transmitting unit.
  • the precoded data signal is encoded by the precoding vector calculated by the calculation unit 1420, and the reflection parameter calculated by the parameter calculation unit 1310 is optionally sent to the intelligent reflective surface via the control link.
  • the electronic device may precode the data signal of the first communication device, and may be included in the first communication device, for example. In this way, utilizing the generated precoding matrix improves the system performance of the smart reflector assisted wireless communication system.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method shown in FIG. 15 may be applied, for example, to a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 3 .
  • step S1501 multiple channel information about the equivalent channel between the first communication device and the second communication device obtained through multiple channel measurements is acquired.
  • the first The second communication device is based on the received reference signal sent from the first communication device, and the reflection signal sent by the intelligent reflective surface between the first communication device and the second communication device reflecting the reference signal using a corresponding set of reflection parameters. Get a channel information.
  • step S1502 by using multiple sets of reflection parameters used in multiple channel measurements to perform joint processing with the acquired multiple channel information, it is determined that multiple integrations that can characterize equivalent channels together with the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface Channel estimation for subchannels.
  • the equivalent channel may include a first link from a first communication device to a second communication device and a second link from the first communication device to the second communication device via a smart reflective surface.
  • the reflected signal of the smart reflective surface may be sent out after each reflective unit of the smart reflective surface adjusts the amplitude and/or phase of the reference signal according to their respective reflection parameters.
  • the plurality of channel information acquired in step S1501 includes a plurality of channel state information of an equivalent channel.
  • step S1501 may further include the following processing: based on the acquired plurality of channel information, respectively determine a plurality of channel estimates of the equivalent channel.
  • the plurality of channel information obtained in step S1501 includes a plurality of channel estimates of equivalent channels.
  • the joint processing performed in step S1502 may include: multiplying an inverse matrix of a training matrix constructed based on multiple extended reflection vectors obtained from multiple sets of reflection parameters and an observation matrix constructed based on multiple channel estimates to determine each The channel matrix of the sub-channels is integrated, wherein the plurality of extended reflection vectors are obtained by adding a predetermined constant to each group of reflection parameters in the plurality of groups of reflection parameters.
  • the smart reflective surface may include M reflective units and use a set of M reflective parameters corresponding to the M reflective units in each reflection, where M is a natural number greater than 1.
  • a channel matrix of M+1 integrated sub-channels in total may be determined through the multiplication.
  • the number of channel measurements performed or the number of sets L of reflection parameters is greater than or equal to M+1.
  • each integrated sub-channel may be represented as a channel matrix of N r *N t , where N r represents the number of antennas of the second communication device and N t represents the antennas of the first communication device number.
  • the values of the M reflection parameters used in each reflection may be selected from the M matrix elements except the first row among the matrix elements of the L-order discrete Fourier transform matrix.
  • the values of the M reflection parameters used in each reflection may be selected from M matrix elements except the first row among the matrix elements of the L-order Hadamard matrix.
  • the method may additionally include, before step S1501 , a step for determining the reflection parameters of the smart reflection surface used in each measurement.
  • the method may further comprise the step of providing (directly or indirectly) control information about the reflection parameters to the intelligent reflective surface.
  • the first communication device may be a network-side device
  • the second communication device may be a user equipment
  • each step of the method shown in FIG. 15 may be performed in the first communication device, and the method may further include the step of sending a reference signal to the second communication device and the smart reflective surface through the first communication device.
  • each step of the method shown in FIG. 15 may be performed in the second communication device, and the method may further include receiving, through the second communication device, the reference signal from the first communication device and the signal from the smart reflective surface. The step of reflecting the signal.
  • the subject performing the above method may be the electronic device 400 , 600 or 700 according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure, so various aspects of the foregoing embodiments about the electronic device 400 , 600 or 700 are all relevant. Applies to this.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method shown in FIG. 16 may be applied, for example, to a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 3 .
  • step S1601 according to the data obtained by using the electronic device (such as electronic device 400 , 600 or 700 ) of the first embodiment or the wireless communication method (such as the method shown in FIG. 15 ) of the first embodiment
  • the channel estimates of the multiple sub-channels are integrated to calculate a first precoding matrix.
  • step S1602 based on the first precoding matrix, the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix of the first communication device are calculated, so that an equivalent value generated based on the calculated reflection coefficient and the second precoding matrix
  • the precoding matrix is similar to the first precoding matrix.
  • the reflection parameters calculated through the processing of step S1602 may include, for example, amplitude parameters and/or phase parameters for performing amplitude adjustment on the signal by each reflection unit of the smart reflective surface.
  • an equivalent precoding matrix may be generated according to the inner product of the extended reflection vector and the second precoding matrix, wherein a predetermined set of reflection parameters used by the smart reflection surface in one reflection is added by adding a predetermined constant to obtain the extended reflection vector.
  • the reflection parameters of the smart reflective surface and the second precoding matrix may be calculated, so that the equivalent precoding matrix generated based on the calculated reflection parameters and the second precoding matrix is the same as the first precoding matrix.
  • the F-norm between matrices is the smallest.
  • the method may additionally include, after step S1602, a step for precoding the data signal of the first communication device using the calculated second precoding matrix.
  • the subject performing the above method may be the electronic device 1000 or 1100 according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure, so various aspects of the foregoing embodiments of the electronic device 1000 or 1100 are applicable to this.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the third embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method shown in FIG. 17 may be applied, for example, to a smart reflector-assisted wireless communication system such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 12 .
  • step S1701 based on the first steering vector of the smart reflective surface in the direction of the arrival angle of the first communication device relative to the smart reflective surface and the departure of the smart reflective surface on the second communication device relative to the smart reflective surface
  • the second steering vector in the angular direction is used to calculate the reflection parameters of the smart reflection surface located between the first communication device and the second communication device, wherein there is no direct link between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • a precoding vector of the first communication device is calculated based on the third steering vector of the first communication device in the direction of departure angle of the smart reflective surface relative to the first communication device.
  • the departure angle or the arrival angle involved in each of the first to third steering vectors involved in the processing of steps S1701 and S1702 includes the departure angle or the arrival angle in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, respectively.
  • the reflection parameters calculated in step S1701 may include amplitude parameters and/or phase parameters that are used for amplitude adjustment of the signal by each reflection unit of the smart reflective surface.
  • step S1701 the product of the conjugate corresponding element of the second steering vector and the first steering vector may be calculated as each reflection parameter of the smart reflection surface.
  • the third steering vector may be divided by the number of antennas of the first communication device as the calculated precoding vector.
  • the method may additionally include, after step S1702, a step for precoding the data signal of the first communication device using the calculated precoding vector.
  • the subject performing the above method may be the electronic device 1300 or 1400 according to the third embodiment of the present disclosure, so various aspects of the foregoing embodiments of the electronic device 1300 or 1400 are applicable to this.
  • the symbol y received by the UE can be further expressed based on equations (16) and (17) in a form that replicates equation (18) as follows:
  • the above equation (18) is established based on a default assumption, that is, the propagation delays of the direct link and the reflected link are almost the same, so the signals of the two links are very important to the communication equipment on the receiving side, such as the UE. are aligned in time.
  • the delay difference between the direct link and the reflected link is ⁇ , the following correspondence exists between the distance difference ⁇ d and the delay difference ⁇ :
  • the transceiver adopts the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) scheme, the Sub-Carrier Spacing (SCS) of which is 15 kHz, and the Cyclic Prefix (Cyclic Prefix) , CP) length is 6.67%.
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SCS Sub-Carrier Spacing
  • Cyclic Prefix Cyclic Prefix
  • CP Cyclic Prefix
  • the BS on the transmitting side first transmits the symbol x 1 at time t0 via the direct link (DTL) and the reflected link (RTL), and at the time delay difference After ⁇ , ie at time t0+ ⁇ , the symbol x 2 is transmitted.
  • the symbol x 1(DTL) sent via the direct link is received at the first time t1
  • the UE on the receiving side receives the symbol x 1 (DTL) transmitted via the direct link at the time that is the first time
  • the symbol x 2 (DTL) transmitted via the direct link is also received.
  • the signal received at the second time t2 is actually the symbol x 1 (RTL) sent at time t0 and transmitted via the reflection link and the signal sent at time t0+ ⁇ Superposition of symbols x 2 (DTL) transmitted via direct link.
  • the delay difference threshold ⁇ th expressed by, for example, equation (40)
  • This time difference cannot be tolerated by the cyclic prefix, and the signal model in equation (18) cannot hold.
  • the delay difference can be appropriately determined to facilitate subsequent processing, such as, but not limited to, the communication device on the receiving side. Signal detection, etc.
  • the inventors propose a fourth embodiment of the present disclosure, which can appropriately estimate the delay difference between the propagation delays of the direct link and the reflected link.
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an electronic device according to a fourth embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the electronic device 180 may include a control unit 180-1 and a transceiving unit 180-2.
  • various units of the electronic device 180 may be included in the processing circuit. It should be noted that the electronic device 180 may include either one processing circuit or multiple processing circuits. Further, the processing circuit may include various discrete functional units to perform various different functions and/or operations. It should be noted that these functional units may be physical entities or logical entities, and units with different names may be implemented by the same physical entity.
  • the electronic device 180 shown in FIG. 18 may be applied to a wireless communication system assisted by a smart reflector such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 3 .
  • a smart reflector such as that previously described with reference to FIG. 3 .
  • the processing implemented by the electronic device 180 and its functional units will continue to be described in conjunction with the example of FIG. 3 .
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 may via a first link (direct link) from another communication device to the electronic device and from all The other communication device receives the predetermined reference signal sent by the other communication device via a second link (reflection link) from the smart reflective surface to the electronic device.
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 may estimate the difference between the first reception time when the predetermined reference signal is expected to be received via the first link and the second reception time when the predetermined reference signal is actually received via the second link Delay difference between the propagation delay of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link.
  • the electronic device 180 may be a device on the receiving side such as the system shown in FIG. 3 .
  • FIG. 19 is introduced here as a modification of FIG. 3 .
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic diagram for explaining a channel in a wireless communication system assisted by an intelligent reflector, which is different from Fig. 3 in that: on the one hand, as an example of a network side device, the base station BS is replaced by TRP; Upstream and downstream transmission scenarios. That is, in FIG. 19 , by adding a superscript “DL” or “UL” to each channel in FIG. 3 , each channel in a downlink scenario is represented or each channel in the uplink scenario
  • DTL The corresponding first link or direct link
  • RTL the or The corresponding first link or direct link
  • DTL can be associated with the channel Reflection matrix ⁇ , channel Corresponding second link or reflection link or with channel Reflection matrix ⁇ , channel Corresponding second link or reflection link
  • RTL channel Corresponding second link or reflection link
  • the communication device on the network side is shown as a TRP in FIG. 19, it may be any network side device such as a base station or the like.
  • the electronic device 180 is a device that receives a predetermined reference signal and estimates the delay difference, that is, it may be the UE in (A) of FIG. 19 or the TRP in (B) of FIG. 19 .
  • Another communication device that communicates with the electronic device 180 may be the TRP in (A) of FIG. 19 or the UE in (B) of FIG. 19 .
  • the predetermined reference signal received by the electronic device 180 such as the UE in (A) of FIG. 19 or the TRP in (B) of FIG. 19 may be in the first link or the direct link DTL. in the null space of the channel.
  • the predetermined reference signal S DRS may satisfy one of the following equations:
  • the reference signal received by the electronic device 180 is briefly described by taking the transmission of the predetermined reference signal in the downlink scenario of FIG. 19(A) as an example.
  • the signal received by the electronic device 180 as the UE can be expressed as follows:
  • the electronic device 180 serving as the UE only receives the reference signal from the RTL
  • the UE which is another communication device, transmits a predetermined reference signal in the uplink scenario of (B) of FIG. 19
  • the predetermined reference signal S DRS satisfies Equation (41-2)
  • the above description will similarly apply. That is, the reference signal via DTL is spatially masked at this time
  • the electronic device 180 as TRP only receives the reference signal from the RTL I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 180 may, for example, use the control unit 180-1's Appropriate processing directly measures the second reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is received via RTL and compares this second reception time with the estimated first reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is expected to be received via DTL to estimate the timing of the two links delay.
  • the electronic device 180 receives a reference as the UE in (A) of FIG. 19 or the TRP in (B) of FIG. 19 ) signal), example processing such as estimating the delay difference performed by each control unit of the electronic device 180, and optional subsequent processing based on the estimated delay difference.
  • the electronic device 180 is first implemented, for example, as the UE in (A) of FIG. 19 , that is, receives a downlink predetermined reference signal that satisfies the above equation (41-1) and is transmitted as a TRP of another communication device S DRS .
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 as the UE may be configured to: determine the transmission time of the predetermined reference signal according to the configuration and/or scheduling information of the predetermined reference signal obtained from another communication device; and Based on the determined transmission time of the predetermined reference signal and timing advance information obtained from the other communication device, a first reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is expected to be received via the first link is estimated.
  • the predetermined reference signal may be a periodic, semi-periodic or aperiodic reference signal, and its specific form is not limited, as long as its sign satisfies the requirements of equation (41-1).
  • the electronic device 180 as the UE may obtain the configuration information of the reference signal from another communication device as the TRP via its transceiving unit 180-2 in advance (for example, the configuration information of the reference signal indicates that the reference signal is to be sent) time-frequency resources of the signal, etc.), and the control unit 180-1 can determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • scheduling information of the reference signal may also be acquired, and the control unit 180-1 may determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • the electronic device 180 as the UE may obtain timing advance information from another communication device as the TRP, for example, in the random access procedure.
  • the control unit 180-1 may acquire timing advance information based on a timing advance command (Timing Advance Command, TAC) sent by the TRP, where the timing advance information indicates a timing advance value configured by the network side for the UE.
  • TAC Timing Advance Command
  • the timing advance mechanism is a mechanism introduced to ensure that the uplink time slot boundary is (approximately) aligned at a network side device such as a base station or a TRP in a scenario of uplink transmission.
  • a network-side device such as a base station or a TRP controls the timing of receiving signals of each terminal by controlling an appropriate timing advance value (offset) for each terminal.
  • the timing advance value is generally set to twice the propagation delay between the terminal and the network side equipment (eg, base station or TRP). In other words, the timing advance value set for the terminal reflects the propagation delay between the terminal and the network side device.
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 as the UE may determine the first link or direct link between the UE and the TRP based on timing advance information obtained in advance from another communication device as the TRP, for example Propagation delay of link DTL.
  • the control unit 180-1 may estimate that the transmission time of the predetermined reference signal, which is determined according to the configuration and/or scheduling information of the predetermined reference signal in the above-described manner, and the obtained timing advance information, may estimate the expectation via the first link or the direct link
  • the DTL receives the first reception time of the predetermined reference signal S DRS .
  • the control unit 180-1 may add the above-mentioned transmission time to the propagation delay of the DTL determined based on the timing advance information, as the first reception time.
  • the control unit 180-1 can directly, for example, use various methods in the prior art. Measure the second reception time of receiving the predetermined reference signal via RTL, and calculate the difference between the second reception time and the estimated first reception time, and use the difference as the estimated propagation delay of the two links. time delay difference.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example process of estimating a delay difference based on a predetermined downlink reference signal.
  • another communication device as TRP transmits the predetermined reference signal S DRS and the electronic device 180 as UE receives (or expects) via two links based on the time of the network side, eg, the TRP side. receive) the timing of the reference signal.
  • the TRP transmits a radio frame carrying a predetermined reference signal S DRS at time T0 , wherein the position of the S DRS in the radio frame is shown with an upward thick arrow, which is determined by the S DRS in the radio frame.
  • the timing offset tDRS in the frame is determined.
  • the electronic device 180 as a UE can, for example, determine the transmission time T0 of the radio frame carrying the S DRS and the timing offset of the S DRS in it via the configuration and/or scheduling information obtained from the TRP, for example shift tDRS .
  • the UE may acquire timing advance information based on, for example, a timing advance command sent by the TRP, where the timing advance information may indicate the timing advance value L TA configured for the UE by the network side.
  • the electronic device 180 As shown in the middle part of FIG. 20 , the electronic device 180 as the UE originally expected to receive the reference signal S DRS via the direct link DTL at the first reception time T1 .
  • the control unit 180-1 may convert the originally expected first reception time according to the previously obtained transmission time T0 of the radio frame carrying the S DRS , the timing advance value L TA , and the timing offset t DRS of the S DRS in the radio frame.
  • T1 is estimated as follows:
  • the electronic device 180 as the UE receives the reference signal S DRS via the reflection link RTL at the second reception time T2.
  • the control unit 180-1 may directly measure the second reception time T2 of receiving the predetermined reference signal S DRS via RTL via various prior art methods.
  • the second reception time T2 satisfies the following relationship:
  • the delay difference ⁇ can be estimated in the following manner:
  • control unit 180-1 may also directly measure the time difference ⁇ t between the time point where the received reference signal S DRS on the RTL link is located and the frame header of the radio frame sent by the TRP, and based on the time difference ⁇ t and For the above-mentioned timing advance value L TA and timing offset t DRS , the delay difference ⁇ is estimated in the following manner:
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 as the UE may control the transceiving unit 180-2 to transmit the delay indicating the estimated delay difference to another communication device, eg, the TRP poor information.
  • another communication device serving as the TRP may, for example, perform joint signal detection on the data signals received via the first link and the second link based on the received delay difference information, so as to obtain the electronic device serving as the UE.
  • another communication device that is a TRP may, for example, determine a second timing advance value applicable to the second link based on the first timing advance value applicable to the first link and based on the received delay difference information, and use Timing advance information indicating the first and second timing advance values is sent to the electronic device 180 as the UE.
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 as a UE may be configured to receive timing advance information indicating two timing advance values from another communication device, eg as a TRP, the two timing advance values Including: a first timing advance value L TA applicable to the first link or direct link DTL, and a first timing advance value L TA that is determined based on the first timing advance value and delay difference information and is applicable to the second link or reflection link RTL The second timing advance value L' TA .
  • the second timing advance value L′ TA determined based on the first timing advance value L TA and ⁇ obtained from the delay difference information satisfies the following equation:
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 as the UE may, for example, under the control of the control unit 180-1, according to the A certain timing advance value L TA transmits a data signal to another communication device as TRP via the first link or the direct link (direct link DTL in (B) of FIG. 19 ), and according to the second timing advance value L′
  • the TA sends a data signal to another communication device as a TRP via the second link or the reflection link (the reflection link RTL in (B) of FIG.
  • the data signals of the two links will arrive at the same time As another communication device of the TRP, it is equivalent to eliminating the time delay difference between the two data signals.
  • the direct link DTL and the reflected link RTL are "aligned", which will help eliminate link interference between the two.
  • the control unit 180-1 and the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 serving as the UE can perform appropriate precoding processing And appropriate transmission processing is performed based on the two timing advance values, so that the data signals of the two links arrive at the other communication device as the TRP at the same time, and can be detected by the TRP through appropriate processing.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram for explaining the direct link DTL and the reflected link RTL in the case where two timing advance values are set and applied.
  • each uplink channel satisfies the sparse channel condition, and the data signal processed by appropriate precoding is transmitted via DTL and RTL and arrives at the receiving side at the same time.
  • the electronic device 180 as a UE transmits a data signal processed by appropriate precoding to another communication device as a TRP via the direct link DTL according to the first timing advance value L TA and according to the second timing advance value L'
  • the TA sends the appropriately precoded data signal to the TRP via the reflective link RTL (using the intelligent reflective surface IRS), the data signals of the two links will arrive at the TRP at the same time, which is equivalent to eliminating the two-way data signal Delay difference between signals.
  • each uplink channel satisfies the sparse channel condition means: the first channel from the electronic device 180 serving as the UE to another communication device serving as the TRP Second channel from electronic device 180 as UE to smart reflector IRS and a third channel from the smart reflector IRS to another communication device as TRP are sparse channels.
  • the sparse channel condition can be expressed by the following mathematical formula:
  • rank( ) represents the rank of the matrix
  • N r represents the number of antennas of the electronic device 180 as the UE
  • N t represents the number of antennas of another communication device as the TRP
  • M represents the number of reflection units of the smart reflector.
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 serving as the UE may, under the control of the control unit 180-1, pass the first link DTL and the second link according to the first timing advance value L TA .
  • the RTL sends the first data signal precoded with the first precoding matrix P DTL to another communication device serving as the TRP.
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 may, under the control of the control unit 180-1, transmit a second precoding matrix P RTL to another communication device serving as a TRP via the DTL and the second link RTL according to the second timing advance value the precoded second data signal.
  • the first precoding matrix P DTL is in the second channel In the null space of
  • the second precoding matrix P RTL is in the first channel In the null space of , that is, the following equations are satisfied:
  • the control unit 180 - 1 uses the first and second precoding matrices to precode the first and second precoding matrices, respectively.
  • the TRP side can perform joint data signal detection by appropriately setting the detection matrix, for example, so as to obtain the first and second data signals sent by the UE side.
  • the electronic device 180 for example, firstly implements the TRP in (B) of FIG. 19 , that is, receives the uplink predetermined reference signal that satisfies the above equation (41-2) and is transmitted by the UE as another communication device. S DRS .
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 as a TRP may be configured to: under the control of the control unit 180-1, receive a first reception of a predetermined reference signal via the first link based on a predetermined expectation At the same time, the configuration and/or scheduling information of the predetermined reference signal is provided to another communication device that is a UE.
  • the electronic device 180 as the network side device TRP may, for example, first determine that it is expected to use the first link
  • the DTL receives the first reception time of the predetermined reference signal, and provides corresponding configuration and/or scheduling information to another communication device serving as the UE based on the determined first receiving time, so that the other communication device serving as the UE is based on the configuration And/or the predetermined reference signal sent by the scheduling information may be received by the electronic device 180 serving as the network-side device TRP at the first reception time.
  • the predetermined reference signal may be a periodic, semi-periodic or aperiodic reference signal, and its specific form is not limited, as long as its sign satisfies the requirements of equation (41-2).
  • the electronic device 180 serving as the network-side device TRP may, for example, send the configuration information of the reference signal to another communication device serving as the UE via its transceiver unit 180-2 in advance (the configuration information of the reference signal, for example, indicates that time-frequency resources for sending the reference signal, etc.), so that the UE can determine the sending time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • scheduling information of the reference signal may also be provided, so that the UE may determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • the electronic device 180 as the network-side device TRP may, for example, provide timing advance information to another communication device as the UE during the random access process.
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 may send a timing advance command (Timing Advance Command, TAC) as the timing advance information under the control of the control unit 180-1, which indicates the timing advance value configured by the network side for the UE.
  • TAC Timing Advance Command
  • the UE may determine the time at which the predetermined reference signal is actually sent based on the configuration and/or scheduling information and timing advance information of the predetermined reference signal, so that the network side can expect to receive the predetermined reference signal via the first link at the predetermined first reception time. reference signal.
  • the UE may subtract the first reception time and the propagation delay of the DTL determined based on the timing advance information as the time to transmit the predetermined reference signal.
  • the control unit 180-1 can directly, for example, use various methods in the prior art. Measure the second reception time of receiving the predetermined reference signal via RTL, and calculate the difference between the second reception time and the predetermined first reception time, and use the difference as the estimated propagation delay of the two links. time delay difference.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example process of estimating a delay difference based on an uplink predetermined reference signal.
  • the control unit 180-1 estimates the delay difference in the above-described manner.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example process of estimating a delay difference based on an uplink predetermined reference signal.
  • the time at the network side such as the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP
  • another communication device serving as the UE transmits the predetermined reference signal S DRS and the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP via two chains The timing at which the reference signal is received (or expected to be received) by the channel.
  • the UE which is another device, transmits a radio frame carrying a predetermined reference signal S DRS at (T0-0.5L TA ) before time T0, in which an upward thick arrow is shown
  • the position of the S DRS in the radio frame is determined by the timing offset t DRS of the S DRS in the radio frame determined based on, for example, configuration information or the like.
  • the electronic device 180 as a TRP may, for example, provide the UE with configuration and/or scheduling information for the reference signal S DRS , for example, indicating that reception of a radio frame carrying the S DRS is expected to be received via the DTL, for example
  • the time T0 and the timing offset t DRS of the S DRS in the radio frame are obtained, for example, by the control unit 180 - 1 of the electronic device 180 according to the predetermined first reception time T1 expected to receive the S DRS via DTL.
  • the UE may obtain timing advance information based on, for example, a timing advance command sent by the electronic device 180 serving as a TRP, where the timing advance information may indicate a timing advance value L TA configured for the UE by the network side.
  • the UE may send a radio frame carrying the predetermined reference signal S DRS with the specified timing offset t DRS at ( T0 - 0.5L TA ) before the time T0.
  • the electronic device 180 As shown in the middle part of FIG. 21 , the electronic device 180 as TRP originally expected to receive the reference signal S DRS via the direct link DTL at the first reception time T1 .
  • the electronic device 180 as the TRP receives the reference signal S DRS via the reflection link RTL at the second reception time T2 .
  • the control unit 180-1 may directly measure the second reception time T2 of receiving the predetermined reference signal S DRS via RTL via various prior art methods.
  • the second reception time T2 satisfies the following relationship:
  • the delay difference ⁇ can be estimated in the following manner:
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP may also directly measure the distance between the time point at which the received reference signal S DRS on the RTL link is located and the frame header of the radio frame that the TRP expects to receive.
  • time difference ⁇ t and based on the time difference ⁇ t and the timing offset t DRS of the reference signal S DRS in the radio frame, the time delay difference ⁇ is estimated in the following manner:
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP can use the determined delay difference to perform subsequent processing in an appropriate manner to help eliminate the adverse effects of the delay difference.
  • the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP may perform joint signal detection on the data signals received via the first link and the second link based on the estimated delay difference to obtain the A data signal sent by another communication device of the UE.
  • the signal sent by another communication device serving as the UE at time t is x 1 and the signal sent at time t+ ⁇ is x 2 , then on the side of the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP, it receives the x 1 signal from the RTL.
  • the x 2 signal from the DTL is superimposed, so the actual received signal should be of the form:
  • the specific signal detection method can be flexibly designed, and only an example method is given here.
  • the rank is r, that is r is a positive integer that satisfies r ⁇ min ⁇ N t ,N r ⁇ .
  • U is an N t ⁇ r-dimensional matrix
  • U I r
  • I represents the identity matrix of the corresponding dimension
  • ⁇ ' is an r ⁇ r-dimensional diagonal matrix, and its diagonal elements are singular value of .
  • channel matrices of each channel can be obtained through actual measurement, or the method described in the "Supplementary Example of Recovering the Complete Channel by the Determining Unit" in the first embodiment. , that is, the full channel is obtained based on the integration of the sub-channels, which is not repeated here.
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 as a TRP may be configured to: based on the first timing advance value L TA applicable to the first link or direct link DTL and the estimated delay difference, A second timing advance value L' TA suitable for the second link or reflected link RTL is determined.
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 may be configured to transmit timing advance information indicating the first timing advance value and the second timing advance value to another communication device that is a UE.
  • control unit 180 determines the second timing advance value L′ TA based on the first timing advance value L TA and the ⁇ obtained from the delay difference information to satisfy equation (47), which is replicated below:
  • another communication device serving as the UE may, for example, follow the manner described in the above 6.2 First Example, according to the first timing advance
  • the value L TA sends a data signal to another communication device as TRP via the direct link DTL and to the TRP via the reflective link RTL according to the second timing advance value L' TA .
  • each uplink channel such as shown in (B) of FIG. 19
  • another communication device as a UE can perform an appropriate precoding process based on two timing advance values.
  • Appropriate transmission processing so that the data signals of the two links arrive at the electronic device 180 as the TRP at the same time (eg, similar to the situation described earlier with reference to FIG. 22 ), and can be processed by the electronic device 180 as the TRP through appropriate processing detection.
  • each uplink channel satisfies the sparse channel condition means: the first channel of the first link or direct link DTL from another communication device serving as the UE to the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP Second channel from another communication device as UE to intelligent reflective surface IRS and a third channel from the smart reflector IRS to the electronics 180 as TRP are sparse channels.
  • these sparse channels satisfy the conditions previously described with reference to equation (48).
  • another communication device serving as the UE may send the first precoding matrix to the electronic device serving as TRP via the first link DTL and the second link RTL according to the first timing advance value L TA .
  • P DTL precoded first data signal may be sent.
  • another communication device serving as the UE may send the second precoding matrix P RTL precoded with the second precoding matrix P RTL to the electronic device serving as TRP via the first link DTL and the second link RTL according to the second timing advance value. data signal.
  • the first precoding matrix P DTL is in the second channel In the null space of
  • the second precoding matrix P RTL is in the first channel In the null space of , that is, the previously described equations (49-1), (49-2) are satisfied.
  • the data signals (symbols) to be sent by DTL and RTL are s DTL and s RTL respectively, then, for example, another communication device serving as the UE performs precoding with the first and second precoding matrices respectively.
  • the electronic device 180 serving as a TRP can perform joint data signal detection by appropriately setting a detection matrix, for example, so as to obtain the first and second data signals sent by the UE side.
  • the control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 as a TRP may be configured to: utilize the first signal detection matrix W DTL , from The first data signal is detected from y in the received joint data signal, and the second data signal is detected from the received joint data signal y using the second signal detection matrix W PTL .
  • the first signal detection matrix W DTL is designed such that the third channel Within the null space of the first signal detection matrix W DTL
  • the second signal detection matrix W PTL is designed such that the first channel In the null space of the second signal detection matrix W PTL , the following equation is satisfied:
  • y DTL For the above-mentioned part y DTL , for example, it can be detected by Zero Forcing (ZF), by left-multiplying it Then, the detection result of the symbol s DTL of the first data signal is obtained.
  • ZF Zero Forcing
  • part y RTL for example, it can be detected by zero forcing (Zero Forcing, ZF), by left-multiplying it And the detection result of the symbol s RTL of the second data signal is obtained.
  • ZF Zero forcing
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP can detect the first data signal and the second data signal sent by another communication device serving as the UE, respectively.
  • the first link or direct link DTL and the second link or reflection link RTL are always used simultaneously.
  • whether it is an uplink scenario or a downlink scenario whether it is a communication device at the receiving end or the sending end (such as the electronic device in the first example of 6.2 and the second example of 6.3), it can be based on channel conditions (such as channel capacity, channel quality) etc.), be sure to use either or both of the two links.
  • control unit of the electronic device can obtain, for example, channel information indicating the channel capacity of the first link or the signal quality of the received signal received via the first link, and based on the obtained channel information and the A predetermined rule related to channel capacity or signal quality determines the use of one or both of the first link and the second link.
  • the above predetermined rules may include: when the channel capacity or signal quality is greater than a first threshold, only the first link is used; when the channel capacity or signal quality is between the first threshold and a second threshold smaller than the first threshold When , the first link and the second link are used at the same time; when the channel capacity or the signal quality is less than the second threshold, only the second link is used.
  • the above-mentioned channel information indicating the channel capacity or the signal quality can be obtained based on various existing methods, which will not be repeated here.
  • simulations were performed for the detection of the received signal in the case of the sparse channel described above.
  • the electronic device on the receiving side of the TRP uses a 4 ⁇ 4 uniform planar antenna array
  • the other communication device on the transmitting side of the UE uses a 2 ⁇ 2 uniform planar antenna array
  • the IRS of the intelligent reflector is an 8 ⁇ 8 uniform planar antenna Array
  • the element spacing of all arrays is half wavelength
  • the simulation adopts the Rice channel model
  • the Rice factor is 10dB.
  • Each channel such as shown in (B) in FIG.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a simulation for explaining the normalized capacity of a channel when the direct link DTL and the reflected link RTL are used in different ways.
  • the horizontal axis of Figure 23 shows the transmit power and the vertical axis the normalized capacity, and respectively the case where only DTL is used, without any processing for the delay difference (ie DTL and RTL are not "aligned") ) when using both DTL and RTL, and when the second timing advance value set for the delay difference is used and processed accordingly (ie DTL and RTL "align").
  • the configuration of the electronic device according to the fifth embodiment of the present disclosure may be similar to that of the fourth embodiment. That is, the electronic device 180 according to the fifth embodiment may also include the control unit 180-1 and the transceiving unit 180-2, and may also be applied to the systems previously described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 19 .
  • the difference between the electronic device of the fifth embodiment and the electronic device of the fourth embodiment that receives a predetermined reference signal is that the electronic device of the fifth embodiment is a communication device that transmits a predetermined reference signal. TRP or the UE in (B) of FIG. 19 to transmit a predetermined reference signal.
  • Another communication device that communicates with the electronic device of the fifth embodiment may be the electronic device of the fourth embodiment that receives a predetermined reference signal, ie, the UE in (A) of FIG. 19 or the TRP in (B) of FIG. 19 . . Since the processing performed by the communication device that transmits the predetermined reference signal has actually been described previously in the description of the fourth embodiment, the details already detailed will not be repeated in the fifth embodiment, but only the general and necessary Supplementary description.
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 can be via a first link (direct link) from the electronic device to another communication device and a second link (reflection link) from the electronic device to the other communication device via the smart reflective surface to send a predetermined reference signal to the other communication device for the other communication device to via the difference between the first reception time when the first link receives the predetermined reference signal and the second reception time when the predetermined reference signal is actually received via the second link, and estimate the propagation delay of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link Delay difference between delays.
  • the other communication device here may be the electronic device described previously according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the predetermined reference signal sent by the electronic device 180 of this embodiment such as the TRP in (A) of FIG. 19 or the UE in (B) of FIG. 19 , may be in the first link or directly Within the null space of the channel of the link DTL.
  • the predetermined reference signal S DRS may satisfy one of the following equations replicated:
  • the electronic device of this embodiment transmits the predetermined reference signal S DRS via the direct link DTL and the reflection link RTL at the same time, the DTL will spatially shield the S DRS , and another communication device on the receiving side actually The superior will only receive the predetermined reference signal S DRS transmitted via RTL.
  • control unit of the electronic device of this embodiment may be configured to, by performing singular value decomposition on the channel of the first link, determine the predetermined reference signal in the null space of the channel.
  • control unit of the electronic device in this embodiment may, in the manner previously described in 6.3 Second Example of the fourth embodiment, control the transmission of the first link.
  • SVD decomposition is carried out, and the decomposition result of equation (56) is reproduced as follows:
  • control unit can obtain the following reference signal S DRS :
  • the reference signal S DRS determined in this way is in the channel of the first link in the null space.
  • the electronic device 180 for example, firstly implements the TRP in (A) of FIG. 19 , that is, transmits the downlink predetermined reference signal S DRS satisfying the above equation (41-1) to the UE as another communication device ;
  • the UE as another communication device may be, for example, the electronic device previously described in the first example of the fourth embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 serving as a TRP may be configured to: under the control of the control unit 180-1, provide a configuration and/or configuration of a predetermined reference signal to another communication device serving as a UE Scheduling information to indicate the transmission time of the predetermined reference signal.
  • the predetermined reference signal may be a periodic, semi-periodic or aperiodic reference signal, and its specific form is not limited, as long as its sign satisfies the requirements of equation (41-1).
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP may provide the UE serving as another communication device with the configuration information of the reference signal (for example, the configuration information of the reference signal indicates the time when the reference signal is sent). frequency resources, etc.), and the UE can determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • the configuration information of the reference signal indicates the time when the reference signal is sent. frequency resources, etc.
  • scheduling information of the reference signal may also be provided, and the UE may determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • the electronic device 180 as the network-side device TRP may, for example, provide timing advance information to another communication device as the UE during the random access process.
  • a timing advance command (Timing Advance Command, TAC) may be sent to the UE as timing advance information, where the timing advance information indicates a timing advance value configured for the UE by the network side.
  • the UE may estimate that it expects to receive the predetermined reference signal S DRS via the first link or direct link DTL based on the transmission time of the predetermined reference signal determined according to the configuration and/or scheduling information of the predetermined reference signal, and the obtained timing advance information the first reception time.
  • the UE may directly measure the second reception time of receiving the predetermined reference signal via RTL via various prior art methods, and calculate the difference between the second reception time and the estimated first reception time, and use the difference value. as the delay difference between the estimated propagation delays of the two links.
  • the UE may transmit delay difference information indicating the estimated delay difference to, for example, the electronic device of this embodiment as a TRP.
  • the transceiver unit of the electronic device of this embodiment may receive delay difference information indicating the estimated delay difference from another communication device serving as the UE.
  • the control unit 180-1 and the like of the electronic device of the present embodiment as the TRP may, for example, based on the received delay difference information, send a pair of messages received via the first link and the second link.
  • the data signal of the UE performs joint signal detection to obtain the data signal sent by another communication device serving as the UE.
  • joint signal detection for example, reference may be made to the part ("Example Processing of Joint Channel Detection Based on Time Delay Difference") described above in the second example of the fourth embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device of the present embodiment as TRP may be configured to: based on the first timing suitable for the first link or the direct link DTL
  • the advance value L TA and the received delay difference information determine a second timing advance value L' TA suitable for the second link or reflected link RTL.
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 may be configured to transmit timing advance information indicating the first timing advance value and the second timing advance value to another communication device that is a UE.
  • the details of determining the timing advance value are similar to those of the fourth embodiment, and are not repeated here.
  • each uplink channel such as shown in (B) of FIG. 19
  • another communication device as a UE can perform an appropriate precoding process based on two timing advance values.
  • Appropriate transmission processing allows the data signals of the two links to arrive at the electronic device 180 as the TRP at the same time, and can be detected by the electronic device 180 as the TRP through appropriate processing.
  • each uplink channel satisfies the sparse channel condition means: the first channel of the first link or direct link DTL from another communication device serving as the UE to the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP Second channel from another communication device as UE to intelligent reflective surface IRS and a third channel from the smart reflector IRS to the electronics 180 as TRP are sparse channels.
  • these sparse channels satisfy the conditions previously described with reference to equation (48).
  • another communication device serving as the UE may transmit the precoding with the first precoding matrix P DTL to the electronic device serving as the TRP via the first link and the second link according to the first timing advance value after the first data signal.
  • another communication device serving as the UE may send the second data signal precoded with the second precoding matrix P RTL to the electronic device serving as the TRP via the first link and the second link according to the second timing advance value .
  • the first precoding matrix P DTL is in the second channel In the null space of
  • the second precoding matrix P RTL is in the first channel In the null space of , that is, the previously described equations (49-1), (49-2) are satisfied.
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 serving as the TRP may be configured to: under the control of the control unit 180-1, receive from another communication device serving as the UE via the first link and the second link A joint data signal, which includes a first data signal sent according to the first timing advance value and precoded with the first precoding matrix P DTL and sent according to the second timing advance value and sent according to the second timing advance value.
  • the coding matrix P RTL precoded second data signal.
  • control unit 180-1 of the electronic device 180 as a TRP may be configured to detect the first data signal from the received joint data signal using the first signal detection matrix W DTL , and to detect the matrix using the second signal W PTL , a second data signal is detected from the received combined data signal.
  • the first signal detection matrix W DTL is designed such that the third channel Within the null space of the first signal detection matrix W DTL
  • the second signal detection matrix W PTL is designed such that the first channel Within the null space of the second signal detection matrix W PTL , ie, the previously described equations (62-1), (62-2) are satisfied.
  • the details of the detection are similar to those of the fourth embodiment, and are not repeated here.
  • the electronic device 180 is first implemented, for example, as the UE in (B) of FIG. 19 , that is, transmits the uplink predetermined reference signal S DRS satisfying the above equation (41-2) to the TRP as another communication device ;
  • the TRP as another communication device may be, for example, the electronic device previously described in the second example of the fourth embodiment.
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 which is the UE, may be configured to obtain, under the control of the control unit 180-1, from the TRP, which is another communication device, a predetermined reception time based on the expected first reception time.
  • the configuration and/or scheduling information of the determined predetermined reference signal may be configured to determine the transmission time of the predetermined reference signal based on the obtained configuration and/or scheduling information and the timing advance information obtained from the TRP as another communication device.
  • the predetermined reference signal may be a periodic, semi-periodic or aperiodic reference signal, and its specific form is not limited, as long as its sign satisfies the requirements of equation (41-2).
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 of the electronic device 180 as the UE may obtain the configuration information of the reference signal from the TRP as another communication device (the configuration information of the reference signal, for example, indicates the time when the reference signal is sent frequency resources, etc.), and the control unit can determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • the configuration information of the reference signal for example, indicates the time when the reference signal is sent frequency resources, etc.
  • scheduling information of the reference signal may also be acquired, and the control unit may determine the transmission time of the reference signal accordingly.
  • the electronic device 180 as the UE may acquire timing advance information from another communication device as the TRP, for example, in the random access procedure.
  • a timing advance command (Timing Advance Command, TAC) may be received from the TRP as timing advance information, where the timing advance information indicates a timing advance value configured by the network side for the UE.
  • the control unit of the electronic device 180 serving as the UE may, for example, determine the time when the predetermined reference signal is actually to be sent based on the configuration and/or scheduling information and timing advance information of the predetermined reference signal, so that the network side can expect to receive the predetermined reference signal at the first predetermined time.
  • the predetermined reference signal is received via the first link.
  • the control unit may subtract the first reception time and the propagation delay of the direct link determined based on the timing advance information as the time to transmit the predetermined reference signal.
  • the details of determining the sending time are similar to those in the fourth embodiment, and are not repeated here.
  • Another communication device on the receiving side of the TRP may calculate the difference between the predetermined first reception time and the directly measured second reception time of receiving the predetermined reference signal via the reflection link, and use the difference as The estimated delay difference.
  • another communication device on the receiving side of the TRP may also determine a second timing advance value applicable to the second link based on the first timing advance value applicable to the first link and the estimated delay difference , and the timing advance information indicating the first timing advance value and the second timing advance value is sent to the electronic device of this embodiment as the UE.
  • the transceiving unit of the electronic device of the present embodiment may receive timing advance information indicating two timing advance values from another communication device which is a TRP.
  • the electronic device of this embodiment as a UE can perform appropriate precoding processing and based on two timing advance The value performs appropriate transmission processing so that the data signals of the two links arrive at the other communication device as the TRP at the same time, and can be detected by the other communication device as the TRP through appropriate processing.
  • each uplink channel satisfies the sparse channel condition means: the first channel of the first link or direct link DTL from the electronic device 180 serving as the UE to another communication device serving as the TRP Second channel from electronic device 180 as UE to smart reflector IRS and a third channel from the smart reflector IRS to another communication device as TRP are sparse channels.
  • these sparse channels satisfy the conditions previously described with reference to equation (48).
  • the transceiver unit of the electronic device 180 serving as the UE may be configured to: under the control of the control unit, according to the first timing advance value, send to the TRP via the first link and the second link.
  • Another communication device sends the first data signal precoded with the first precoding matrix P DTL ; according to the second timing advance value, sends the first data signal to the other communication device as TRP via the first link and the second link.
  • Two precoding matrix P RTL precoded second data signal.
  • the first precoding matrix P DTL is in the second channel In the null space of
  • the second precoding matrix P RTL is in the first channel In the null space of , that is, the previously described equations (49-1), (49-2) are satisfied.
  • 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the fourth embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method shown in FIG. 24 may, for example, be applied to a wireless communication system assisted by a smart reflective surface such as previously described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 19 , and may be implemented by the electronic device in the fourth embodiment described previously. Since the wireless communication method implemented by the electronic device has actually been described in the description of the fourth embodiment, the detailed details will not be repeated here, but only an overview. Various aspects of the device apply here.
  • step S2401 via a first link from another communication device to the electronic device and a second link from the other communication device to the electronic device via a smart reflective surface, A predetermined reference signal sent by the other communication device is received.
  • step S2402 the first link is estimated based on the difference between the first reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is expected to be received via the first link and the second reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is actually received via the second link The delay difference between the propagation delay of and the propagation delay of the second link.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the wireless communication method according to the fifth embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method shown in FIG. 25 can be applied, for example, to a wireless communication system assisted by a smart reflector such as previously described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 19 , and can be implemented by the electronic device in the fifth embodiment described previously. Since the wireless communication method implemented by the electronic device has actually been described in the previous description of the fifth embodiment, the details already detailed will not be repeated here, but only an overview. Various aspects of the device apply here.
  • step S2501 via the first link from the electronic device to another communication device and the second link from the electronic device to the other communication device via the smart reflective surface, to the other communication device the other communication device transmits a predetermined reference signal for the other communication device based on a first reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is expected to be received via the first link and a second reception time at which the predetermined reference signal is actually received via the second link The difference between the propagation delays of the first link and the propagation delay of the second link is estimated.
  • each of the electronic devices 400, 600, 700, 1000, 1100, 1300, 1400, 180 can be implemented as any type of base station device, such as macro eNB and small eNB, and can also be implemented as any type of gNB (5G system base station in ).
  • Small eNBs may be eNBs covering cells smaller than macro cells, such as pico eNBs, micro eNBs, and home (femto) eNBs.
  • the base station may be implemented as any other type of base station, such as NodeB and base transceiver station (BTS).
  • a base station may include: a subject (also referred to as a base station device) configured to control wireless communications; and one or more remote radio heads (RRHs) disposed at a different location than the subject.
  • RRHs remote radio heads
  • each of the electronic devices 400, 600, 700, 1000, 1100, 1300, 1400, 180 may also be implemented as any type of TRP.
  • the TRP may have sending and receiving functions, for example, it may receive information from user equipment and base station equipment, and may also send information to user equipment and base station equipment.
  • the TRP can serve the user equipment and be controlled by the base station equipment.
  • the TRP may have a structure similar to that of the base station equipment, or may only have the structure related to sending and receiving information in the base station equipment.
  • each of the electronic devices 400, 600, 700, 1000, 1100, 1300, 1400, 180 may also be various user devices, which may be implemented as mobile terminals such as smart phones, tablet personal computers (PCs), notebooks PCs, portable game terminals, portable/dongle-type mobile routers, and digital cameras) or in-vehicle terminals such as car navigation devices.
  • the user equipment may also be implemented as a terminal performing machine-to-machine (M2M) communication (also referred to as a machine type communication (MTC) terminal).
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • MTC machine type communication
  • the user equipment may be a wireless communication module (such as an integrated circuit module comprising a single die) mounted on each of the above-mentioned user equipments.
  • eNB 1800 includes one or more antennas 1810 and base station equipment 1820.
  • the base station apparatus 1820 and each antenna 1810 may be connected to each other via an RF cable.
  • Each of the antennas 1810 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) antenna), and is used by the base station apparatus 1820 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the eNB 1800 may include multiple antennas 1810.
  • multiple antennas 1810 may be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1800.
  • FIG. 26 shows an example in which the eNB 1800 includes multiple antennas 1810, the eNB 1800 may also include a single antenna 1810.
  • the base station apparatus 1820 includes a controller 1821 , a memory 1822 , a network interface 1823 , and a wireless communication interface 1825 .
  • the controller 1821 may be, for example, a CPU or a DSP, and operates various functions of a higher layer of the base station apparatus 1820 .
  • the controller 1821 generates data packets from the data in the signal processed by the wireless communication interface 1825, and communicates the generated packets via the network interface 1823.
  • the controller 1821 may bundle data from a plurality of baseband processors to generate a bundled packet, and deliver the generated bundled packet.
  • the controller 1821 may have logical functions to perform controls such as radio resource control, radio bearer control, mobility management, admission control, and scheduling. This control may be performed in conjunction with nearby eNB or core network nodes.
  • the memory 1822 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs executed by the controller 1821 and various types of control data such as a terminal list, transmission power data, and scheduling data.
  • the network interface 1823 is a communication interface for connecting the base station apparatus 1820 to the core network 1824 .
  • Controller 1821 may communicate with core network nodes or further eNBs via network interface 1823 .
  • the eNB 1800 and core network nodes or other eNBs may be connected to each other through logical interfaces such as S1 interface and X2 interface.
  • the network interface 1823 may also be a wired communication interface or a wireless communication interface for wireless backhaul. If the network interface 1823 is a wireless communication interface, the network interface 1823 may use a higher frequency band for wireless communication than the frequency band used by the wireless communication interface 1825 .
  • Wireless communication interface 1825 supports any cellular communication scheme, such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE-Advanced, and provides wireless connectivity to terminals located in cells of eNB 1800 via antenna 1810.
  • the wireless communication interface 1825 may generally include, for example, a baseband (BB) processor 1826 and RF circuitry 1827 .
  • the BB processor 1826 may perform, for example, encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, and multiplexing/demultiplexing, and performs layers such as L1, Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)) various types of signal processing.
  • the BB processor 1826 may have some or all of the above-described logical functions.
  • the BB processor 1826 may be a memory storing a communication control program, or a module including a processor and associated circuitry configured to execute the program.
  • the update procedure may cause the functionality of the BB processor 1826 to change.
  • the module may be a card or blade that is inserted into a slot in the base station device 1820. Alternatively, the module can also be a chip mounted on a card or blade.
  • the RF circuit 1827 may include, for example, a mixer, a filter, and an amplifier, and transmit and receive wireless signals via the antenna 1810 .
  • the wireless communication interface 1825 may include a plurality of BB processors 1826.
  • multiple BB processors 1826 may be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1800.
  • the wireless communication interface 1825 may include a plurality of RF circuits 1827.
  • multiple RF circuits 1827 may be compatible with multiple antenna elements.
  • FIG. 26 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 1825 includes multiple BB processors 1826 and multiple RF circuits 1827 , the wireless communication interface 1825 may include a single BB processor 1826 or a single RF circuit 1827 .
  • the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 previously described with reference to FIG. 6 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 1825 (optionally together with the antenna 1810) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 previously described with reference to FIG. 7 may be implemented by the controller 1821 (optionally together with the wireless communication interface 1825 and the antenna 1810 ) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 410 in the electronic device 400 previously described with reference to FIG. 4 may be implemented similarly to the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 or the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 .
  • the determination units 420 , 620 , and 720 in the electronic devices 400 , 600 , and 700 may be implemented by the controller 1821 .
  • the transmitting unit 630 in the electronic device 600 and the receiving unit 730 in the electronic device 700 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 1825 (optionally together with the antenna 1810 ) or the like.
  • the first computing units 1010 and 1110 and the second computing units 1020 and 1120 in the electronic devices 1000 and 1100 previously described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11 may be implemented by the controller 1821.
  • the precoding 1130 unit in the electronic device 1100 may be implemented, for example, by the controller 1821 or by the wireless communication interface 1825 (eg, under the control of the controller 1821 ).
  • the reflection calculation units 1310 and 1410 and the precoding calculation units 1320 and 1420 in the electronic devices 1300 and 1400 previously described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 may be implemented by the controller 1821.
  • the precoding unit 1430 in the electronic device 1400 may be implemented by the controller 1821 or by the wireless communication interface 1825 (eg, under the control of the controller 1821 ), for example.
  • control unit 180-1 in the electronic device 18 previously described with reference to FIG. 18 may be implemented by the controller 1821.
  • the transceiving unit 180-2 in the electronic device 180 may be implemented, for example, through the wireless communication interface 1825 (optionally together with the antenna 1810) (eg, under the control of the controller 1821).
  • eNB 1930 includes one or more antennas 1940, base station equipment 1950, and RRH 1960.
  • the RRH 1960 and each antenna 1940 may be connected to each other via RF cables.
  • the base station apparatus 1950 and the RRH 1960 may be connected to each other via high-speed lines such as fiber optic cables.
  • Each of the antennas 1940 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a MIMO antenna) and is used by the RRH 1960 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the eNB 1930 may include multiple antennas 1940.
  • multiple antennas 1940 may be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1930.
  • FIG. 27 shows an example in which the eNB 1930 includes multiple antennas 1940, the eNB 1930 may also include a single antenna 1940.
  • the base station apparatus 1950 includes a controller 1951 , a memory 1952 , a network interface 1953 , a wireless communication interface 1955 , and a connection interface 1957 .
  • the controller 1951 , the memory 1952 and the network interface 1953 are the same as the controller 1821 , the memory 1822 and the network interface 1823 described with reference to FIG. 26 .
  • the network interface 1953 is a communication interface for connecting the base station apparatus 1950 to the core network 1954 .
  • Wireless communication interface 1955 supports any cellular communication scheme, such as LTE and LTE-Advanced, and provides wireless communication via RRH 1960 and antenna 1940 to terminals located in a sector corresponding to RRH 1960.
  • the wireless communication interface 1955 may generally include, for example, a BB processor 1956.
  • the BB processor 1956 is the same as the BB processor 1826 described with reference to FIG. 26, except that the BB processor 1956 is connected to the RF circuit 1964 of the RRH 1960 via the connection interface 1957.
  • the wireless communication interface 1955 may include a plurality of BB processors 1956.
  • multiple BB processors 1956 may be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1930.
  • FIG. 27 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 1955 includes multiple BB processors 1956 , the wireless communication interface 1955 may include a single BB processor 1956 .
  • connection interface 1957 is an interface for connecting the base station apparatus 1950 (the wireless communication interface 1955 ) to the RRH 1960.
  • the connection interface 1957 may also be a communication module for communication in the above-mentioned high-speed line connecting the base station device 1950 (the wireless communication interface 1955) to the RRH 1960.
  • the RRH 1960 includes a connection interface 1961 and a wireless communication interface 1963.
  • connection interface 1961 is an interface for connecting the RRH 1960 (the wireless communication interface 1963 ) to the base station apparatus 1950.
  • the connection interface 1961 may also be a communication module for communication in the above-mentioned high-speed line.
  • the wireless communication interface 1963 transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 1940 .
  • Wireless communication interface 1963 may typically include RF circuitry 1964, for example.
  • RF circuitry 1964 may include, for example, mixers, filters, and amplifiers, and transmit and receive wireless signals via antenna 1940 .
  • the wireless communication interface 1963 may include a plurality of RF circuits 1964.
  • multiple RF circuits 1964 may support multiple antenna elements.
  • FIG. 27 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 1963 includes a plurality of RF circuits 1964 , the wireless communication interface 1963 may include a single RF circuit 1964 .
  • the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 previously described with reference to FIG. 6 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 1963 (optionally together with the antenna 1940) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 previously described with reference to FIG. 7 may be implemented by the controller 1951 (optionally together with the wireless communication interface 1963 and the antenna 1940 ) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 410 in the electronic device 400 previously described with reference to FIG. 4 may be implemented similarly to the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 or the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 .
  • the determination units 420 , 620 and 720 in the electronic devices 400 , 600 and 700 may be implemented by the controller 1951 .
  • the transmitting unit 630 in the electronic device 600 and the receiving unit 730 in the electronic device 700 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 1963 (optionally together with the antenna 1940 ) or the like.
  • the first computing units 1010 and 1110 and the second computing units 1020 and 1120 in the electronic devices 1000 and 1100 previously described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11 may be implemented by the controller 1951.
  • the precoding 1130 unit in the electronic device 1100 may be implemented, for example, by the controller 1951 or by the wireless communication interface 1955 or 1963 (eg, under the control of the controller 1951 ).
  • the reflection calculation units 1310 and 1410 and the precoding calculation units 1320 and 1420 in the electronic devices 1300 and 1400 previously described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 can be implemented by the controller 1951.
  • the precoding unit 1430 in the electronic device 1400 may be implemented by the controller 1951 or by the wireless communication interface 1955 or 1963 (eg, under the control of the controller 1951 ), for example.
  • control unit 180-1 in the electronic device 18 previously described with reference to FIG. 18 may be implemented by the controller 1951.
  • transceiver unit 180 - 2 in the electronic device 180 may be implemented, for example, through the wireless communication interface 1955 or 1963 (optionally together with the antenna 1940 ) (eg, under the control of the controller 1951 ).
  • FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone 2000 to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied.
  • Smartphone 2000 includes processor 2001, memory 2002, storage device 2003, external connection interface 2004, camera device 2006, sensor 2007, microphone 2008, input device 2009, display device 2010, speaker 2011, wireless communication interface 2012, one or more Antenna switch 2015, one or more antennas 2016, bus 2017, battery 2018, and auxiliary controller 2019.
  • the processor 2001 may be, for example, a CPU or a system on a chip (SoC), and controls the functions of the application layer and further layers of the smartphone 2000 .
  • the memory 2002 includes RAM and ROM, and stores data and programs executed by the processor 2001 .
  • the storage device 2003 may include a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory and a hard disk.
  • the external connection interface 2004 is an interface for connecting external devices such as memory cards and Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to the smartphone 2000 .
  • the camera 2006 includes an image sensor such as a charge coupled device (CCD) and a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), and generates a captured image.
  • Sensors 2007 may include a set of sensors, such as measurement sensors, gyroscope sensors, geomagnetic sensors, and acceleration sensors.
  • the microphone 2008 converts the sound input to the smartphone 2000 into an audio signal.
  • the input device 2009 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a keypad, a keyboard, buttons, or switches configured to detect a touch on the screen of the display device 2010, and receives operations or information input from a user.
  • the display device 2010 includes a screen such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) and an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, and displays an output image of the smartphone 2000 .
  • the speaker 2011 converts the audio signal output from the smartphone 2000 into sound.
  • the wireless communication interface 2012 supports any cellular communication scheme, such as LTE and LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication.
  • Wireless communication interface 2012 may typically include, for example, BB processor 2013 and RF circuitry 2014.
  • the BB processor 2013 can perform, for example, encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, and multiplexing/demultiplexing, and perform various types of signal processing for wireless communication.
  • the RF circuit 2014 may include, for example, mixers, filters, and amplifiers, and transmit and receive wireless signals via the antenna 2016 .
  • the wireless communication interface 2012 may be a chip module on which the BB processor 2013 and the RF circuit 2014 are integrated. As shown in FIG.
  • the wireless communication interface 2012 may include a plurality of BB processors 2013 and a plurality of RF circuits 2014 .
  • FIG. 28 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 2012 includes multiple BB processors 2013 and multiple RF circuits 2014
  • the wireless communication interface 2012 may include a single BB processor 2013 or a single RF circuit 2014 .
  • the wireless communication interface 2012 may support additional types of wireless communication schemes, such as short-range wireless communication schemes, near field communication schemes, and wireless local area network (LAN) schemes.
  • the wireless communication interface 2012 may include a BB processor 2013 and an RF circuit 2014 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • Each of the antenna switches 2015 switches the connection destination of the antenna 916 between a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 2012 (eg, circuits for different wireless communication schemes).
  • Each of the antennas 2016 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a MIMO antenna), and is used for the wireless communication interface 2012 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the smartphone 2000 may include multiple antennas 2016 .
  • FIG. 28 shows an example in which the smartphone 2000 includes multiple antennas 2016
  • the smartphone 2000 may also include a single antenna 2016 .
  • the smartphone 2000 may include an antenna 2016 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • the antenna switch 2015 can be omitted from the configuration of the smartphone 2000 .
  • the bus 2017 connects the processor 2001, the memory 2002, the storage device 2003, the external connection interface 2004, the camera device 2006, the sensor 2007, the microphone 2008, the input device 2009, the display device 2010, the speaker 2011, the wireless communication interface 2012, and the auxiliary controller 2019 to each other connect.
  • the battery 2018 provides power to the various blocks of the smartphone 2000 shown in FIG. 28 via feeders, which are partially shown in phantom in the figure.
  • the auxiliary controller 2019 operates the minimum necessary functions of the smartphone 2000, eg, in a sleep mode.
  • the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 previously described with reference to FIG. 6 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 2012 (optionally together with the antenna 2016 ) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 described earlier with reference to FIG. 7 may be implemented by the processor 2001 (optionally together with the wireless communication interface 2012 and the antenna 2016 ) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 410 in the electronic device 400 previously described with reference to FIG. 4 may be implemented similarly to the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 or the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 .
  • the determination units 420 , 620 and 720 in the electronic devices 400 , 600 and 700 may be implemented by the processor 2001 .
  • the transmitting unit 630 in the electronic device 600 and the receiving unit 730 in the electronic device 700 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 2012 (optionally together with the antenna 2016 ) or the like.
  • the first computing units 1010 and 1110 and the second computing units 1020 and 1120 in the electronic devices 1000 and 1100 previously described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11 may be implemented using the processor 2001 .
  • the precoding 1130 unit in the electronic device 1100 may be implemented, for example, by the processor 2001 or by the wireless communication interface 2012 (eg, under the control of the processor 2001 ).
  • the reflection calculation units 1310 and 1410 and the precoding calculation units 1320 and 1420 in the electronic devices 1300 and 1400 previously described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 may be implemented by the processor 2001 .
  • the precoding unit 1430 in the electronic device 1400 may be implemented, for example, by the processor 2001 or by the wireless communication interface 2012 (eg, under the control of the processor 2001 ).
  • control unit 180 - 1 in the electronic device 18 previously described with reference to FIG. 18 may be implemented by the processor 2001 .
  • the transceiver unit 180-2 in the electronic device 180 may be implemented, for example, through the wireless communication interface 2012 (optionally together with the antenna 2016) (eg, under the control of the processor 2001).
  • FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation apparatus 2120 to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the car navigation device 2120 includes a processor 2121, a memory 2122, a global positioning system (GPS) module 2124, a sensor 2125, a data interface 2126, a content player 2127, a storage medium interface 2128, an input device 2129, a display device 2130, a speaker 2131, a wireless A communication interface 2133, one or more antenna switches 2136, one or more antennas 2137, and a battery 2138.
  • GPS global positioning system
  • the processor 2121 may be, for example, a CPU or a SoC, and controls the navigation function and other functions of the car navigation device 2120 .
  • the memory 2122 includes RAM and ROM, and stores data and programs executed by the processor 2121 .
  • the GPS module 2124 measures the position (such as latitude, longitude, and altitude) of the car navigation device 2120 using GPS signals received from GPS satellites.
  • Sensors 2125 may include a set of sensors such as gyroscope sensors, geomagnetic sensors, and air pressure sensors.
  • the data interface 2126 is connected to, for example, the in-vehicle network 2141 via a terminal not shown, and acquires data generated by the vehicle, such as vehicle speed data.
  • the content player 2127 reproduces content stored in storage media such as CDs and DVDs, which are inserted into the storage media interface 2128 .
  • the input device 2129 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a button, or a switch configured to detect a touch on the screen of the display device 2130, and receives an operation or information input from a user.
  • the display device 2130 includes a screen such as an LCD or OLED display, and displays an image of a navigation function or reproduced content.
  • the speaker 2131 outputs the sound of the navigation function or the reproduced content.
  • the wireless communication interface 2133 supports any cellular communication scheme such as LTE and LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication.
  • Wireless communication interface 2133 may typically include, for example, BB processor 2134 and RF circuitry 2135.
  • the BB processor 2134 may perform, for example, encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, and multiplexing/demultiplexing, and perform various types of signal processing for wireless communication.
  • the RF circuit 2135 may include, for example, a mixer, a filter, and an amplifier, and transmit and receive wireless signals via the antenna 2137 .
  • the wireless communication interface 2133 can also be a chip module on which the BB processor 2134 and the RF circuit 2135 are integrated. As shown in FIG.
  • the wireless communication interface 2133 may include a plurality of BB processors 2134 and a plurality of RF circuits 2135 .
  • FIG. 29 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 2133 includes multiple BB processors 2134 and multiple RF circuits 2135
  • the wireless communication interface 2133 may include a single BB processor 2134 or a single RF circuit 2135 .
  • the wireless communication interface 2133 may support another type of wireless communication scheme, such as a short-range wireless communication scheme, a near field communication scheme, and a wireless LAN scheme.
  • the wireless communication interface 2133 may include the BB processor 2134 and the RF circuit 2135 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • Each of the antenna switches 2136 switches the connection destination of the antenna 2137 among a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 2133, such as circuits for different wireless communication schemes.
  • Each of the antennas 2137 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a MIMO antenna), and is used for the wireless communication interface 2133 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the car navigation device 2120 may include a plurality of antennas 2137 .
  • FIG. 29 shows an example in which the car navigation device 2120 includes a plurality of antennas 2137
  • the car navigation device 2120 may also include a single antenna 2137 .
  • the car navigation device 2120 may include an antenna 2137 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • the antenna switch 2136 may be omitted from the configuration of the car navigation device 2120.
  • the battery 2138 provides power to the various blocks of the car navigation device 2120 shown in FIG. 29 via feeders, which are partially shown in the figure as dashed lines.
  • the battery 2138 accumulates power supplied from the vehicle.
  • the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 previously described with reference to FIG. 6 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 2133 (optionally together with the antenna 2137 ) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 previously described with reference to FIG. 7 may be implemented by the processor 2121 (optionally together with the wireless communication interface 2133 and the antenna 2137 ) or the like.
  • the acquisition unit 410 in the electronic device 400 previously described with reference to FIG. 4 may be implemented similarly to the acquisition unit 610 in the electronic device 600 or the acquisition unit 710 in the electronic device 700 .
  • the determination units 420, 620, 720 in the electronic devices 400, 600, 700 may be implemented by the processor 2121.
  • the transmitting unit 630 in the electronic device 600 and the receiving unit 730 in the electronic device 700 may be implemented through the wireless communication interface 2133 (optionally together with the antenna 2137 ) or the like.
  • the first computing units 1010 and 1110 and the second computing units 1020 and 1120 in the electronic devices 1000 and 1100 previously described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11 may utilize the processor 2121 accomplish.
  • the precoding 1130 unit in the electronic device 1100 may be implemented, for example, by the processor 2121 or by the wireless communication interface 2133 (eg, under the control of the processor 2121 ).
  • the reflection calculation units 1310 and 1410 and the precoding calculation units 1320 and 1420 in the electronic devices 1300 and 1400 previously described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 can be implemented by the processor 2121 .
  • the precoding unit 1430 in the electronic device 1400 may be implemented, for example, by the processor 2121 or by the wireless communication interface 2133 (eg, under the control of the processor 2121 ).
  • control unit 180 - 1 in the electronic device 18 previously described with reference to FIG. 18 may be implemented by the processor 2121 .
  • the transceiver unit 180 - 2 in the electronic device 180 may be implemented, for example, through the wireless communication interface 2133 (optionally together with the antenna 2137 ) (eg, under the control of the processor 2121 ).
  • the techniques of this disclosure may also be implemented as an in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 2140 that includes one or more blocks of a car navigation device 2120 , an in-vehicle network 2141 , and a vehicle module 2142 .
  • the vehicle module 2142 generates vehicle data such as vehicle speed, engine speed, and failure information, and outputs the generated data to the in-vehicle network 2141 .
  • the units shown in dotted boxes in the functional block diagram shown in the accompanying drawings all indicate that the functional unit is optional in the corresponding device, and each optional functional unit can be combined in an appropriate manner to realize the required function .
  • a plurality of functions included in one unit in the above embodiments may be implemented by separate devices.
  • multiple functions implemented by multiple units in the above embodiments may be implemented by separate devices, respectively.
  • one of the above functions may be implemented by multiple units. Needless to say, such a configuration is included in the technical scope of the present disclosure.
  • the steps described in the flowcharts include not only processing performed in time series in the stated order, but also processing performed in parallel or individually rather than necessarily in time series. Furthermore, even in the steps processed in time series, needless to say, the order can be appropriately changed.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

本公开提供了电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质。电子设备包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置为：获取经由多次信道测量获得的、关于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息，在每次信道测量中，第二通信设备基于所接收的从第一通信设备发送的参考信号、以及第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面使用相应的一组反射参数反射所述参考信号而发出的反射信号而获得一个信道信息；以及通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征所述等效信道的多个整合子信道的信道估计。

Description

电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质 技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域，更具体地，涉及在用作收发机的两个通信设备之间存在智能反射面的情况下进行信道估计或预编码的电子设备、无线通信方法以及非暂态计算机可读存储介质。
背景技术
目前，智能反射面(Intelligent reflecting surface，IRS)已得到越来越多的关注。通过在发射机与接收机之间布置IRS，可以在原有的发射机-接收机链路(下文中也称为“直接链路”)的基础上，增加一条发射机-IRS-接收机链路(下文中也称为“反射链路”)，这两条链路既可以同时使用，以提高数据率并提升通信系统的有效性，也可以作为彼此的后备链路，以提高通信系统的可靠性。
与一般的多入多出(Multiple-input-multiple-output，MIMO)系统类似，在智能反射面多入多出(IRS-MIMO)系统中，也需要进行信道估计以及基于信道估计进行预编码，以消除用户间干扰并提升通信系统有效性。
然而，智能反射面一般不配备射频链路，并且仅针对其接收到的信号通过按照反射参数改变幅度和/或相位而进行反射。因此，常规的信道估计方法无法适用于IRS与收发机之间的信道。
因此，期望针对用作收发机的两个通信设备之间存在智能反射面的情况提供一种适当的信道估计方法，并且可选地提供一种相应的预编码方法。
此外，对于发射机与接收机之间布置了IRS从而在两者之间同时存在直接链路和反射链路的情况，直接链路与反射链路可能具有不同的传播时延。因此，期望能适当地估计两条链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
发明内容
在下文中给出了关于本公开的简要概述，以便提供关于本公开的某些方面的基本理解。但是，应当理解，这个概述并不是关于本公开的穷举性概述。它并不是意图用来确定本公开的关键性部分或重要部分，也不是意 图用来限定本公开的范围。其目的仅仅是以简化的形式给出关于本公开的某些概念，以此作为稍后给出的更详细描述的前序。
鉴于上述问题，本公开的至少一方面的目的是提供一种电子设备、无线通信方法以及非暂态计算机可读存储介质，其能够在用作收发机的两个通信设备之间存在智能反射面的情况下进行适当的信道估计或预编码。
此外，本公开的至少又一方面的目的是提供一种电子设备、无线通信方法以及非暂态计算机可读存储介质，其能够在用作收发机的两个通信设备之间存在智能反射面的情况下，适当地估计收发机之间不经由智能反射面的直接链路的传播时延与经由智能反射面的反射链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
根据本公开的第一方面，提供了一种电子设备，其包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置为：获取经由多次信道测量获得的、关于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息，在每次信道测量中，第二通信设备基于第一通信设备发送的参考信号、以及第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面使用相应的一组反射参数反射所述参考信号而发出的反射信号而获得一个信道信息；以及通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征所述等效信道的多个整合子信道的信道估计。
根据本公开的第二方面，提供了一种电子设备，其包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置为：根据利用第一方面的电子设备获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算第一预编码矩阵；以及基于第一预编码矩阵，计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射参数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵相似。
根据本公开的第三方面，提供了一种电子设备，其包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置为：基于智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量以及智能反射面在第二通信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量，计算位于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面的反射参数，其中，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路；以及基于第一通信设备在智能反射面相对于第一通信设备的出发角方向的第三导向矢量，计算第一通信设备的预编码向量。
根据本公开的第一方面，还提供了一种无线通信方法，其包括：获取 经由多次信道测量获得的、关于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息，在每次信道测量中，第二通信设备基于第一通信设备发送的参考信号、以及第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面使用相应的一组反射参数反射所述参考信号而发出的反射信号而获得一个信道信息；以及通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征所述等效信道的多个整合子信道的信道估计。
根据本公开的第二方面，还提供了一种无线通信方法，其包括：根据利用第一方面的电子设备或无线通信方法获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算第一预编码矩阵；以及基于第一预编码矩阵，计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射参数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵相似。
根据本公开的第三方面，还提供了一种无线通信方法，其包括：基于智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量以及智能反射面在第二通信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量，计算位于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面的反射参数，其中，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路；以及基于第一通信设备在智能反射面相对于第一通信设备的出发角方向的第三导向矢量，计算第一通信设备的预编码向量。
根据本公开的第四方面，提供了一种电子设备，其包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置为：经由从另一通信设备到所述电子设备的第一链路以及从所述另一通信设备经由智能反射面到所述电子设备的第二链路，接收所述另一通信设备发送的预定参考信号；以及基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
根据本公开的第四方面，还提供了一种无线通信方法，其包括：经由从另一通信设备到电子设备的第一链路以及从所述另一通信设备经由智能反射面到所述电子设备的第二链路，接收所述另一通信设备发送的预定参考信号；以及基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
根据本公开的第五方面，提供了一种电子设备，其包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置为：经由从所述电子设备到另一通信设备的第一链路以及从所述电子设备经由智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第二链路，向所述另一通信设备发送预定参考信号，以供所述另一通信设备基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
根据本公开的第五方面，还提供了一种无线通信方法，其包括：经由从电子设备到另一通信设备的第一链路以及从所述电子设备经由智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第二链路，向所述另一通信设备发送预定参考信号，以供所述另一通信设备基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
根据本公开的另一方面，还提供了一种存储有可执行指令的非暂态计算机可读存储介质，该可执行指令当由处理器执行时，使得处理器执行上述无线通信方法或电子设备的各个功能。
根据本公开的其它方面，还提供了用于实现上述根据本公开的无线通信方法的计算机程序代码和计算机程序产品。
根据本公开的实施例的至少一方面，针对其间设置了智能反射面的、用作收发机的两个通信设备，以智能反射面的反射参数与多个整合子信道一起表征等效信道，从而可以将多次信道测量所使用的多组反射参数与所获得的多个信道信息进行联合处理而确定各个整合子信道的信道估计。
根据本公开的实施例的另一方面，可以利用以上述方式获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计来计算第一预编码矩阵，并基于第一预编码矩阵计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵，从而能够适当设置反射参数并对数据信号进行适当的预编码。
根据本公开的实施例的又一方面，对于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路的情况，可以利用第一通信设备与智能反射面之间以及智能反射面与第二通信设备之间的出发角和/或到达角，计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的预编码向量，从而能够以简化的方式适当设置反射参数并对数据信号进行适当的预编码。
根据本公开的实施例的至少再一方面，对于用作收发机的两个通信设 备之间存在智能反射面的情况，可以适当地估计收发机之间不经由智能反射面的直接链路的传播时延与经由智能反射面的反射链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
在下面的说明书部分中给出本公开实施例的其它方面，其中，详细说明用于充分地公开本公开实施例的优选实施例，而不对其施加限定。
附图说明
在此描述的附图只是为了所选实施例的示意的目的而非全部可能的实施，并且不旨在限制本公开的范围。在附图中：
图1是用于说明智能反射面的基本工作原理的示意图；
图2是示出了智能反射面的示例应用场景的示意图；
图3是用于说明智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的等效信道的示意图；
图4是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例的框图；
图5是示出图4所示的电子设备中的确定单元的一个配置示例的框图；
图6是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例的框图；
图7是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第三配置示例的框图；
图8是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的信息交互流程的一个示例的流程图；
图9是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的信息交互流程的另一示例的流程图；
图10是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例的框图；
图11是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例的框图；
图12是用于说明特定情况下的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的 等效信道的示意图；
图13是示出根据本公开的第三实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例的框图；
图14是示出根据本公开的第三实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例的框图；
图15是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图；
图16是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图；
图17是示出根据本公开的第三实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图；
图18是示出根据本公开的第四和第五实施例的电子设备的配置示例的框图；
图19是用于说明智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的信道的示意图；
图20是用于说明基于下行的预定参考信号估计时延差的示例处理的示意图；
图21是用于说明基于上行的预定参考信号估计时延差的示例处理的示意图；
图22是用于说明设置并应用了两个定时提前值的情况下的直接链路和反射链路的示意图；
图23是用于说明以不同方式使用直接链路和反射链路的情况下信道的归一化容量的仿真示意图；
图24是示出根据本公开的第四实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图；
图25是示出根据本公开的第五实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图；
图26是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第一示例的框图；
图27是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第二 示例的框图；
图28是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的智能电话的示意性配置的示例的框图；
图29是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的汽车导航设备的示意性配置的示例的框图。
虽然本公开容易经受各种修改和替换形式，但是其特定实施例已作为例子在附图中示出，并且在此详细描述。然而应当理解的是，在此对特定实施例的描述并不打算将本公开限制到公开的具体形式，而是相反地，本公开目的是要覆盖落在本公开的精神和范围之内的所有修改、等效和替换。要注意的是，贯穿几个附图，相应的标号指示相应的部件。
具体实施方式
现在参考附图来更加充分地描述本公开的例子。以下描述实质上只是示例性的，而不旨在限制本公开、应用或用途。
提供了示例实施例，以便本公开将会变得详尽，并且将会向本领域技术人员充分地传达其范围。阐述了众多的特定细节如特定部件、装置和方法的例子，以提供对本公开的实施例的详尽理解。对于本领域技术人员而言将会明显的是，不需要使用特定的细节，示例实施例可以用许多不同的形式来实施，它们都不应当被解释为限制本公开的范围。在某些示例实施例中，没有详细地描述众所周知的过程、众所周知的结构和众所周知的技术。
将按照以下顺序进行描述：
1.概述
1.1智能反射面的简要介绍
1.2智能反射面的应用场景的示例
1.3智能反射面相关的信道整合
2.第一实施例的配置示例
2.1第一配置示例
2.2第二配置示例
2.3第三配置示例
2.4信息交互流程的示例
3.第二实施例的配置示例
3.1第一配置示例
3.2第二配置示例
4.第三实施例的配置示例
4.1无直接链路时的预编码计算4.2第一配置示例
4.3第二配置示例
5.第一至第三实施例的方法实施例
5.1第一实施例的方法实施例
5.2第二实施例的方法实施例
5.2第三实施例的方法实施例
6.第四实施例的配置示例
6.0时延差的产生
6.1配置示例
6.2第一示例
6.3第二示例
7.第五实施例的配置示例
7.1配置示例
7.2第一示例
7.3第二示例
8.第四至第五实施例的方法实施例
8.1第四实施例的方法实施例
8.2第五实施例的方法实施例
9.应用示例
<1.概述>
[1.1智能反射面的简要介绍]
智能反射面又称作可重构智能表面(Reconfigurable Intelligent Surface，RIS)或者大规模智能表面(Large intelligent surface，LIS)，是由许多低成本的无源反射阵子(也称为“阵子”或“阵元”，本文中也将其称为“反射单元”)所构成的大规模阵列。基于可重构电磁表面技术，阵列中的各个阵子或反射单元可以将入射到阵面的电磁波反射出去，同时根据相位调节系数调整反射波的相位，并且可选地根据幅度调节系数调整电磁波的幅度。本文中也将上述相位调节系数和幅度调节系数统称为反射参数。
图1是用于说明智能反射面的基本工作原理的示意图，其示意性地示出了智能反射面的传统应用场景。如图1所示，智能反射面被用于实现可重构反射阵天线，即，将有源天线101和智能反射面102整合到一起，使用有源天线101照射智能反射面102产生反射波，接收端103接收从智能反射面102反射出的电磁波，实现信号传输的功能。智能反射面102具有多个反射阵元(图中示意性地以多个黑色实心矩形示出)中，可以在控制电路(图中未示出)的控制下，根据相应的反射参数合理调节各个反射阵元所反射的信号的相位(以及可选地调节幅度)，从而达到波束赋形的效果。
[1.2智能反射面的应用场景的示例]
目前，引起关注的智能反射面的一种应用是将智能反射面分布式地部署在收发两端之间的某个位置。图2示出了适合应用智能反射面的一种示例场景。如图2的上图所示，当基站BS与用户设备UE之间存在较强的遮挡202时，视距传输条件即直视径(Line of sight，LOS)被破坏，一般的非视距传输即非直视径(Non line of sight，NLOS)信道增益低，造成接收端的UE信噪比条件较差。此时，可以如图2的下图所示，在BS与UE之间的建筑物201上布置智能反射面IRS，利用IRS的反射阵元的特性合理调整反射信号的相位(以及可选地调节幅度)，以将信号能量集中到UE所在的方向，从而可以有效提高接收端信噪比。
可见，通过在发射机与接收机之间布置智能反射面，可以在原有的发射机-接收机链路的基础上，增加一条发射机-智能反射面-接收机链路，这两条链路既可以同时使用，以提高数据率并提升通信系统的有效性(诸如在图2所示的示例中那样)，也可以作为彼此的后备链路，以提高无线通 信系统的可靠性。因此，这类智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统引起了研究者的广泛关注。
在智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中，收发端或有一方配备多天线时，就构成了一个智能反射面多入多出(IRS-MIMO)系统。与一般的多入多出(MIMO)系统类似，在IRS-MIMO系统中，也需要进行信道估计以及基于信道估计进行预编码，以消除用户间干扰并提升通信系统有效性。
然而，智能反射面一般不配备射频链路，并且仅针对其接收到的信号通过按照反射参数改变幅度和/或相位而进行反射。因此，常规的信道估计方法无法适用于智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的收发机之间的信道。
[1.3智能反射面相关的信道整合]
为此，发明人提出了一种进行信道整合的发明构思，其将智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的信道重组整合成与反射参数无关的多个整合子信道，并利用这些整合子信道与IRS的反射参数一起表示整个等效信道。这样的整合子信道可以用于信道估计并且可以相应地应用于预编码，接下来将参照图3对该信道整合进行概述。
图3是用于说明智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的等效信道的示意图。图3所示的无线通信系统包括第一通信设备BS、第二通信设备UE、以及两者之间的设置在建筑物上的智能反射面IRS。智能反射面IRS可以包括M个反射单元(M为大于1的自然数)，在IRS的控制电路(未示出)的控制下，这些反射单元基于例如经由以虚线示出的控制链路从BS接收的关于反射参数的控制信息，根据相应的M个反射参数对BS发送的信号进行幅度和/或相位调节以发出能够被UE接收的反射信号。这里，尽管将第一通信设备示出为基站，但其也可以是任意的网络侧设备例如TRP等。
这里，将以IRS仅进行相位调节(即反射参数中的幅度调节系数为1)的情况为例，说明等效信道的情况。基于相位调节描述的示例可以适当地应用于同时进行幅度调节的情况，稍后将在必要时进行相应描述。在仅进行相位调节的情况下，可以利用
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000001
代表第m个反射单元的反射参数(m＝1,2,…M)，从而可以利用具有下述等式(1)形式的、M×M的对角矩阵Λ(反射参数的对角阵在下文中适当时也称为“反射矩阵”)来代表IRS的M个反射单元分别对其反射信号进行的相位调整。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000002
相应地，可以通过下述等式(2)表示BS与UE之间的等效信道H eq(Λ)：
H eq(Λ)＝H 0+H rΛH t    (2)
如等式(2)所示，等效信道H eq(Λ)包括从BS到UE的第一链路H 0(“直接链路”)以及从BS经由IRS到UE的第二链路H rΛH t(“反射链路”)。这里，如图3所示，H t表示BS到IRS的信道，其可以具有M×N t矩阵的形式，其中N t表示BS的天线数；H r表示IRS到UE的信道，其可以具有N r×M矩阵的形式，其中N r表示UE的天线数。
从等式(2)可以看出，图3的无线通信系统中的等效信道会随着IRS的反射单元的反射参数的变化而变化(与反射矩阵Λ相关)。在该系统中，尽管H 0仍然可以通过利用基于参考信号进行信道测量(或信道观测)的传统方式(这种传统方式也可以称为导频训练)获得，但由于常规的IRS没有配置射频链路，不具有数字信号处理的能力，H r和H t无法直接以利用参考信号进行信道测量的方式获得，因此基于传统的导频训练只能估计出带有变量(反射参数)的整体等效信道H eq(Λ)的信息。这意味着，每当反射参数改变时，都需要彻底重新进行整个等效信道的信道估计。
鉴于上述问题，发明人提出了本公开的发明构思：将BS到UE的信道H 0、BS到IRS的信道H t、IRS到UE的信道H r重组整合成与反射参数无关的多个整合子信道，并利用这些整合子信道与IRS的反射参数一起表示整个等效信道。利用以上方式，可以通过使用不同的反射参数利用参考信号进行信道观测而求解与反射参数无关的多个整合子信道。此外，还可以基于这样求解的整合子信道来计算预编码矩阵。
接下来，将描述利用上述发明构思的用于信道估计的第一实施例、基于第一实施例的信道估计的用于计算预编码矩阵的第二实施例、以及用于在特定情况计算预编码矩阵的第三实施例。
<2.第一实施例的配置示例>
[2.1第一配置示例]
(基本配置)
图4是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例的框图。
如图4所示，电子设备400可以包括获取单元410和确定单元420。
这里，电子设备400的各个单元都可以包括在处理电路中。需要说明的是，电子设备400既可以包括一个处理电路，也可以包括多个处理电路。进一步，处理电路可以包括各种分立的功能单元以执行各种不同的功能和/或操作。需要说明的是，这些功能单元可以是物理实体或逻辑实体，并且不同称谓的单元可能由同一个物理实体实现。
作为示例，图4所示的电子设备400可以应用于诸如此前<1.概述>中参照图3描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统。以下，将继续结合图3的示例描述电子设备400及其功能单元所实现的处理。
根据本公开的实施例，电子设备400的获取单元410可以获取经由多次信道测量获得的、关于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息。在每次信道测量中，第二通信设备基于所接收的从第一通信设备发送的参考信号、以及第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面使用相应的一组反射参数反射所述参考信号而发出的反射信号，获得等效信道的一个信道信息。
电子设备400的确定单元420可以通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的(与反射参数无关的)多个整合子信道的信道估计。
作为示例，第一通信设备可以是图3所示的网络侧设备BS，第二通信设备可以是图3所示的用户设备UE。下文中主要以第一通信设备是网络侧设备BS且第二通信设备是用户设备UE为例进行描述，但在本公开内容的基础上，可以适当地采取不同的设置。例如，当用户设备具有较强处理能力的情况下，第一通信设备可以是用户设备且第二通信设备可以是网络侧设备，这里不再赘述。
第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面可以是例如图3所示的、具有M个反射单元的智能反射面IRS。假设共进行L次信道测量 (L为大于1的、适当设置的自然数)，在其中的第l次信道测量中，第二通信设备所接收的反射信号例如是智能反射面的各个反射单元在自身的控制电路(未示出)的控制下，根据各自的反射参数对参考信号进行幅度和/或相位调节后发出的(l＝1，2，…,L)。
在一个示例中，可以由电子设备400的确定单元420实现确定这些反射参数的功能。图5示出了了这样的确定单元420的一个配置示例，其中确定单元420包括可选的反射参数确定模块421、以及信道估计确定模块422，这里首先描述反射参数确定模块421的功能。
反射参数确定模块421可以被配置为确定每次测量中所使用的智能反射面的反射参数，以供智能反射面根据相应的反射参数反射参考信号。电子设备400可以经由未示出的发送单元向智能反射面直接地或间接地提供关于反射参数的控制信息(例如，包括反射参数的信息)。例如，电子设备400可以将关于反射参数的控制信息发送给诸如网络侧设备的第一通信设备，使得第一通信设备通过控制链路向智能反射面(例如与参考信号同时)发送相应的控制信息，以供智能反射面根据控制信息所指示的反射参数反射参考信号。替选地，在智能反射面配置了相应处理电路的情况下，电子设备400可以将关于反射参数的控制信息一次性地直接发送智能反射面，以供智能反射面后续在每次反射中使用。
作为示例，基于反射参数确定模块421所生成的关于反射参数的控制信息，在第l次信道测量中，智能反射面可以使用具有等式(1)的反射矩阵Λ中的对角元的形式的、第l组M个反射参数。每个反射参数可以由反射参数确定模块421适当地设置。作为示例，反射参数确定模块421可以随机生成反射矩阵中的反射参数，即等式(1)的中
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000003
的ω m取值可以是随机数。这里，将主要以智能反射面仅进行相位调节(反射参数模长为1，即幅度调节系数为1)的情况为例，说明电子设备400的相应处理。基于相位调节描述的示例可以适当地应用于同时进行幅度调节的情况，后续在必要时将会对此进行相应描述。
如前所述，在诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道可以包括从第一通信设备到第二通信设备的第一链路(“直接链路”)以及从第一通信设备经由智能反射面到第二通信设备的第二链路(“反射链路”)。
作为示例，第一通信设备BS所发送的参考信号例如可以是信道状态 指示-参考信号(Channel Status Indicator-Reference Signal,CSI-RS)等。第二通信设备UE可以基于其接收的、通过直接链路和反射链路到达UE的参考信号(即，直接从BS接收的参考信号以及从IRS接收的、IRS根据第l组反射参数对BS发出的参考信号进行调节后发出的反射信号)，针对这两个链路构成的等效信道进行信道测量，并且获得等效信道的信道信息。
如前所述，发明人所提出的对等效信道进行信道整合的发明构思将例如图3所示的第一通信设备BS到第二通信设备UE的信道H 0、第一通信设备BS到智能反射面IRS的信道H t、智能反射面IRS到第二通信设备UE的信道H r重组整合成与反射参数无关的多个整合子信道，并利用这些整合子信道与IRS的反射参数一起表示整个等效信道。
因此，根据本公开的实施例，电子设备400的确定单元420的信道估计确定模块422可以被配置为通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的(与反射参数无关的)多个整合子信道的信道估计。
换言之，在诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中，可以通过使用确定单元420的反射参数确定模块421所确定的不同反射参数利用参考信号进行L次信道测量，并且获得相应的L个等效信道的信道信息(l＝1，2，…,L)。确定单元420例如通过信道估计确定模块422对这些反射参数和信道信息进行联合处理，从而确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的多个整合子信道的信道估计。
接下来，将描述本公开实施例中可以采用的、能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的与反射参数无关的整合子信道的示例，并且结合这样的整合子信道的示例描述电子设备400中的各个单元所执行的处理或处理所涉及的信息/数据/参数的示例。
(整合子信道的示例)
为描述整合子信道，首先，可以定义具有下述等式(3)形式的、由具有M个反射单元的智能反射面的M个反射参数(即等式(1)的反射矩阵Λ的对角元)构造出的列向量，作为反射向量μ：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000004
可以通过为上述反射向量μ添加一个预定常数而获得扩展反射向量。本示例中，采用的反射参数不涉及相位调节(即，反射参数的模为1)，因此添加的预定常数为1。仅为便于理解，将预定常数1设置在扩展反射向量中的第一位，从而定义具有下述等式(4)形式的扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000006
基于上述扩展反射向量的定义，可以定义如下的(M+1)个整合子信道H m：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000007
其中，[H r] (:,m)表示H r的第m列，[H t] (m,:)表示H t的第m行。按照以上方式定义的整合子信道具有N r*N t的矩阵形式，其中，N r表示接收端的第二通信设备的天线数，N t表示发送端的第一通信设备的天线数。
基于以上等式(4)和(5)，将等效信道从等式(2)的形式化为以下等式(6)的形式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000009
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000010
是代表克罗内克积的运算符，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000011
是N r阶的单位矩阵，用于将扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000012
的转置
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000013
通过克罗内克积运算转换为适合于与多个整合子信道进行矩阵相乘运算的矩阵形式。为便于描述，下文中也将
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000014
称为扩展反射矩阵，将
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000015
称为多个整合子信道构成的级联信道。
在以上示例中，采用的反射参数不涉及相位调节，因此反射向量具有等式(3)的形式。如果所采用的反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节，则可以为等式(3)的反射向量中的每个元素添加一个幅度调节系数a m变为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000016
(m＝1.2,...,M)，这种情况下，由于反射参数的模长不再为1，为了获得扩展反射向量而在等式(4)所添加的预定常数可以是一个任意值而不再限于1。除此之外，本示例中的内容将类似地适用于反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节的情况，即，等式(5)-(6)构建的整合子信道将 会同样适用。
按照以上描述的方式，将整个等效信道表示为基于反射参数的扩展反射矩阵与和反射参数无关的整合子信道构成的级联信道相乘的形式，从而相当于将与智能反射面的反射参数相关的信道部分和与智能反射面的反射参数无关的信道部分解耦，进而可以有利地利用反射参数以及对等效信道的观测结果，求解与智能反射面的反射参数无关的整合子信道。
在以上描述的整合子信道的示例的基础上，本领域人员可以进行适当的修改和变形，只要能够将整个等效子信道表示为彼此解耦的、与智能反射面的反射参数相关的信道部分和与智能反射面的反射参数无关的信道部分即可。例如，这里为了便于理解，在等式(4)中将添加的预定常数设置扩展反射向量的第一位，实际上可以将其添加在(M+1)个位置中任意一处，只要相应地调整等式(5)中H 0的位置即可(即，确保所添加的常数是用于在等式(6)中与H 0相乘)。
(获取单元所获取的信道信息的示例)
在一个实施例中，电子设备400的获取单元410所获取的多个信道信息可以包括第二通信设备通过信道测量获得的、等效信道的多个信道估计(等效信道的信道估计在后文中也称为“观测信道”)。例如，对于第l次信道测量，第二通信设备UE可以基于通过直接链路以及反射链路(其中的IRS应用了例如由电子设备400的确定单元420的反射参数确定模块421生成的第l组反射参数)到达UE的诸如CSI-RS的参考信号，进行等效信道的信道测量，并且可以通过各种现有方式获得该等效信道的观测信道，以将其提供给电子设备400的获取单元410。
替选地，电子设备400的获取单元410所获取的多个信道信息可以包括第二通信设备通过信道测量获得的等效信道的多个信道状态信息。例如，对于第l次信道测量，第二通信设备UE可以进行等效信道的信道测量，并且可以将获得的信道状态信息以例如信道状态信息(Channel State Information,CSI)报告等形式提供给电子设备400的获取单元410。在这种情况下，获取单元410可以被配置为基于所获取的多个信道信息，以现有方式分别确定等效信道的多个信道估计例如多个观测信道。换言之，获取单元410可以具有以现有方式基于等效信道的信道状态信息等执行等效信道的信道估计的功能。
(确定单元所进行的联合处理的示例)
当利用获取单元410所获取的等效信道的信道估计确定整合子信道的信道估计时，电子设备400的确定单元420例如通过信道估计确定模块422所进行的示例联合处理可以包括：将基于(例如由反射参数确定模块421生成的并应用于信道测量的)多组反射参数获得的多个扩展反射向量构造的训练矩阵的逆矩阵与基于多个信道估计(观测信道)构造的观测矩阵相乘，以确定各个整合子信道的信道矩阵。注意，这里的训练矩阵的“逆矩阵”包含伪逆矩阵的情况，稍后将对此进行详细描述。
为进行上述联合处理，信道估计确定模块422例如可以向(例如由反射参数确定模块421生成的并应用于信道测量的)多组反射参数中的每组反射参数分别添加一个预定常数而获得上述多个扩展反射向量。作为示例，当智能反射面包括M个反射单元并在每次反射中使用例如由反射参数确定模块421生成的、与M个反射单元对应的一组M个反射参数(例如具有等式(1)中的对角元的形式)时(M为大于1的自然数)，信道估计确定模块422使用的扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000017
可以具有以下等式(4’)中M+1维向量的形式，即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000018
这里，l＝1，2，…,L，分别对应于L次信道测量中的第l次信道测量。
信道估计确定模块422可以基于扩展反射向量构建训练矩阵，以联合表示多次信道测量所使用的反射参数。作为示例，可以将等式(4’)形式的L个扩展反射向量分别作为各列而构成下述(M+1)×L的训练矩阵Σ：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000019
另一方面，信道估计确定模块422可以基于各次信道测量的信道估计(观测信道)构造观测矩阵，以联合表示多次信道测量的测量结果。
例如，对于第l次信道测量，其等效信道可以表示为基于扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000020
的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000021
(例如具有等式(6)的形式)，获取单元410所获取的信道估计可以表示为该等效信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000022
的观测信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000023
信道估计确定模块422例如可以将L次信道测量得到的各个观测信道分别作为各行而获得 如下观测矩阵A，以联合表示多次信道测量的信道估计：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000024
信道估计确定模块422可以将按照以上方式构造的训练矩阵的逆矩阵与观测矩阵相乘，以求解与智能反射面无关的多个整合子信道。接下来将描述这种相乘处理所依据的原理以及其实现的细节。
对于第l次信道测量，可以将等式(4’)形式的扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000025
带入表示等效信道的等式(6)，同时考虑噪声的影响，以将获取单元410所获取的等效信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000026
的信道估计表示为如下观测信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000028
其中，Z l是接收端的第二通信设备的噪声。如此前参照等式(6)所述，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000029
是N r阶的单位矩阵，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000030
表示(M+1)个整合子信道，其中每个整合子信道H m的定义如此前描述的等式(5)所示(m＝0,1,….M)。在实际处理中，可以简单地将每个整合子信道表示为N r*N t的信道矩阵，其中，N r表示第二通信设备的天线数，N t表示第一通信设备的天线数。
按照以上等式(9)联合表示所有L个观测信道，可以得到下述等式(10)
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000031
将按照上述等式(7)和(8)构造的训练矩阵∑和观测矩阵A带入等式(10)，可以获得观测矩阵A与训练矩阵∑及整合子信道H 0…H M之间的关系如下
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000032
对于以上等式(11)，信道估计确定模块422可以将该等式的两边分别左乘训练矩阵Σ的伪逆矩阵(Σ *Σ T) -1Σ *，即，将训练矩阵的(伪)逆矩阵与观测矩阵A相乘，则可得到各个整合子信道的信道估计：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000033
其中
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000034
是等效噪声。从等式(12)可以看出，在噪声不存在的理想情况下，即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000035
时，信道估计确定模块422利用上述方法得到整合子信道的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000036
(m＝0,1,….M)与整合子信道的真值H m相等。
这里，将信道测量的次数或反射参数的组数L设置为大于或等于整合子信道的个数M+1。可以理解，为了求解M+1个整合子信道，需要获得L≥M+1个测量结果。另外，在等式(12)中，由于训练矩阵Σ本身不一定是方阵，因此采用了伪逆矩阵(Σ *Σ T) -1Σ *进行矩阵相乘运算。为了确保训练矩阵Σ的伪逆矩阵存在，要求其共轭转置矩阵Σ *与转置矩阵Σ T的乘积(Σ *Σ T)是可逆的。为此，要求基于多个扩展反射向量按照等式(7)构造的训练矩阵∑是行满秩的，即rank(Σ *Σ T)＝M+1。这实际上对例如由确定单元420的反射参数确定模块421生成的、在信道测量中使用的反射参数提出了要求，稍后将会描述确定符合该要求的反射参数的示例。
在以上示例中，采用的反射参数不涉及相位调节，因此例如由反射参数确定模块421生成的反射参数具有例如等式(1)的形式，使得扩展反射向量和训练矩阵具有等式(4’)和(7)的形式。如果所采用的反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节，反射参数确定模块421生成的每个反射参数可以具有相应的幅度调节系数，从而等式(4’)的反射向量中的每个反射参数可以通过添加幅度调节系数a m,l而变为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000037
(m＝1,2,...,M,l＝1，2，…,L)，并且为了获得扩展反射向量而在等式(4’)所添加的预定常数可以是任意值而不再限于1。相应地，等式(7)的训练矩阵中的每个反射参数也变为带有幅度调节系数的形式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000038
并且第一行的预定常数可以是任意值而不再限于1。除此之外，本示例中的内容将类似地适用于反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节的情况，即，通过等式(8)-(12)求解整合子信道的处理将会同样适用。
通过以上描述的方式，确定单元420的信道估计确定模块422可以利用基于(例如由反射参数确定模块421生成的并应用于信道测量的)多组反射参数获得的多个扩展反射向量构造训练矩阵，并将训练矩阵的逆矩阵(包括伪逆矩阵)与基于多个信道估计(观测信道)构造的观测矩阵相乘，从而确定各个整合子信道的信道矩阵。这样确定的整合子信道与智能反射 面的反射参数无关，可以有利地用于各种后续处理诸如预编码等，稍后将在第二实施例中对这种应用进行详细描述。
在以上描述的确定单元420所进行的联合处理的示例的基础上，本领域人员可以进行适当的修改和变形，只要能够利用反射参数构造训练矩阵、并将训练矩阵的逆矩阵(伪逆矩阵)与基于多个信道估计(观测信道)构造的观测矩阵相乘以求解等效子信道即可。
(信道测量中使用的反射参数的示例)
如前所述，智能反射面在每次信道测量中使用与其所包括的M个反射单元对应的一组M个反射参数。可以利用电子设备400的确定单元420中所包括的可选的反射参数确定模块421确定这些反射参数，并且电子设备400可以将关于反射参数的控制信息适当地提供给智能反射面。
作为示例，反射参数确定模块421所确定的每次信道测量中使用的M个反射参数可以是随机生成的。以智能反射面仅进行相位调整为例，反射参数确定模块421所确定的每次信道测量中使用的M个反射参数可以具有等式(1)中的对角元
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000039
的形式(即，模长为1)，并且ω m取值可以是随机数(m＝1,2,...,M)。
如此前在确定单元所进行的联合处理的示例中所述，希望进行L≥M+1次信道测量以获得等效信道的大于或等于M+1个信道估计，并且希望例如按照等式(4’)基于L组反射参数所获得的L个扩展反射向量例如按照等式(7)而构造的训练矩阵∑是行满秩的，以使确定单元(例如通过信道估计确定模块422)能够基于训练矩阵∑的(伪)逆矩阵求解M+1个整合子信道。因此，反射参数确定模块421可以统一确定满足以上要求的L组反射参数，以供智能反射面在L≥M+1次信道测量中使用。
作为示例，返回参照等式(7)所示的(M+1)×L训练矩阵∑，反射参数确定模块422可以通过确定该矩阵的每个矩阵元素而以确定∑的方式确定反射参数：所确定的训练矩阵∑中第l列相当于第l个扩展反射向量(l＝1,2,…,L)，第l列第2至M+1矩阵元素[∑] k,l(k＝2,3…M+1)即为要在第l次信道测量中使用的一组M个反射参数。
举例而言，反射参数确定模块421可以对训练矩阵∑采用启发式的设计。例如，可以确定训练矩阵∑的各个元素[∑] k,l(k＝1,2,…,M+1；l＝1,2,…,L)如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000040
上述训练矩阵∑中第l列相当于第l个扩展反射向量，反射参数确定模块421可以将该列的第2至M+1矩阵元素确定为要在第l次信道测量中使用M个反射参数。
此外，反射参数确定模块421例如还可以对训练矩阵∑采用哈达玛矩阵(Hadamard matrix)的设计。例如，每次反射中使用的M个反射参数的取值可以选自L阶哈达玛矩阵的矩阵元素当中除了第一行以外的M个矩阵元素。
这里对哈达玛矩阵进行简单介绍，不失一般性，记L＝2 B(B为大于1的自然数)，则可以由如下方式构造哈达玛矩阵：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000041
例如记L阶的哈达玛矩阵为G L，则反射参数确定模块421基于G L确定训练矩阵∑的示例方法为以G L的第一行作为∑的第一行，以G L除第一行外的其他任意不同的M行作为∑的第二行到第M+1行。这样得到的训练矩阵∑的第l列相当于第l个扩展反射向量(l＝1,2,…,L)，反射参数确定模块421可以将该列的第2至M+1矩阵元素确定为要在第l次信道测量中使用M个反射参数。
作为另一示例，反射参数确定模块421可以对训练矩阵∑采用离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier transform，DFT)的设计。例如，每次反射中使用的M个反射参数的取值可以选自L阶离散傅里叶变换矩阵的矩阵元素当中除了第一行以外的M个矩阵元素。
记L阶的DFT矩阵为F L，F L的第c行第l列(c＝1,2,…,C，其中，C≥M+1；l＝1,2,…,L)的元素定义如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000042
反射参数确定模块421基于F L确定训练矩阵∑的示例方法为以F L的第一行作为Σ的第一行，以F L除第一行外的其他任意不同的M行作为∑的第二行到第M+1行。这样得到的训练矩阵∑的第l列相当于第l个扩展反射向量(l＝1,2,…,L)，反射参数确定模块421可以将该列的第2至M+1矩阵 元素确定为要在第l次信道测量中使用M个反射参数。
在以上示例中，以采用的反射参数不涉及相位调节的方式设计了示例训练矩阵，因此矩阵中的每个元素模长为1，即，第2至M+1行的各个矩阵元素具有
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000043
的形式(k＝2,3…M+1,l＝1，2，…,L)(等式(13)-(15)给出的矩阵为此情况下的特例)。如果所采用的反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节，则可以为这样的训练矩阵的第2至M+1行的各个矩阵元素添加一个幅度调节系数，使得矩阵元素变为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000044
(k＝2,3…M+1,l＝1，2，…,L)。相应地，可以获得的同时涉及幅度和相位调节的训练矩阵。
针对以上设置的各种反射参数(随机设计方案、基于等式(13)的启发式设计方案、基于等式(14)的哈达玛矩阵设计、基于等式(15)的DFT矩阵设计)进行了仿真，以在不同发射功率(0至20dBm的发射功率约束)下确定整合子信道的估计值和真值之间的均方误差(Mean square error，MSE)。在本示例中，作为第一通信设备的BS和作为第二通信设备的UE均采用2×2均匀平面天线阵列，智能反射面IRS为8×8均匀平面阵列，所有阵列的阵元间距均为半波长，仿真采用莱斯信道模型，莱斯因子为10dB。预先设置了诸如图3所示的从BS到UE的信道H 0、BS到IRS的信道H t、IRS到UE的信道H r，因而整合子信道的真值可以通过以上描述的等式(5)基于H 0、H t和H r获得。仿真发现各种符合(M+1)×L的训练矩阵Σ的设计原则(L≥M+1且Σ行满秩)的方案都可以获得很好的估计性能。整合子信道的估计值和真值之间的MSE在0至20dBm的发射功率约束下都很小(不超过-70dB)，这说明所提出的子信道估计方法是可行的。另外，在0至20dBm的发射功率约束下，基于等式(13)的启发式的设计方案的MSE从约-92dB下降到约-102dB，比随机设计方案的MSE(从约-78dB到约-85dB)的性能更好，而基于等式(14)的哈达玛矩阵的设计和基于等式(15)的DFT矩阵的设计的MSE都从约-110dB下降到约-130dB，即，性能是最好的。这两种设计的优异表现原因在于DFT矩阵和哈达玛矩阵都是酉矩阵，在进行等式(12)中的操作时不会出现放大噪声的问题。
以上给出了信道测量中使用的反射参数的示例。在此基础上，本领域人员可以进行适当的修改和变形，只要能够利用各组反射参数构造训练矩阵、并且能够获得这样的训练矩阵的逆矩阵(伪逆矩阵)，以用于联合基于多个信道估计(观测信道)构造的观测矩阵共同处理而获得等效子信道即可。
(确定单元恢复完全信道的补充示例)
在本补充示例中，例如当经由上述方式确定了各个整合子信道之后，鉴于整合子信道与各个实际信道之间的关系(例如参照此前的等式(2)-(6))，确定单元还可以基于各个整合子信道，通过适当的附加处理来恢复诸如如图3所示的第一通信设备BS到第二通信设备UE的信道H 0、第一通信设备BS到智能反射面IRS(其具有反射矩阵Λ))的信道H t、智能反射面IRS到第二通信设备UE的信道H r。在本补充示例中，图3所示的信道可以分别简称为直接信道H 0、入射信道H t、反射信道H r，并且统称为完全信道。如前所述，经由直接信道H 0构成从BS到UE的第一链路H 0(“直接链路”)，并且经由入射信道H t、智能反射面IRS(具有反射矩阵Λ)的信道H t构成从BS经由IRS到UE的第二链路H rΛH t(“反射链路”)。
首先，为便于描述，返回参照此前等式(5)所描述的整合子信道H m，并定义r m＝[H r] (:，m)以表示反射信道H r的第m列，定义
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000045
以表示入射信道H t的第m行。于是，等式(5)转换为下述形式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000046
这里，认为已经按照此前描述的方式，估计出了M+1个整合子信道H m，m＝0,…,M。
如前所述，在所确定的共M+1个整合子信道的信道矩阵当中，一个整合子信道H 0能够表征从第一通信设备BS到第二通信设备UE的第一链路(直接链路)，其余M个整合子信道H m(m＝1,…,M)能够与智能反射面IRS的反射参数(即，此前描述的反射矩阵Λ)一起表征从第一通信设备BS经由智能反射面IRS到第二通信设备UE的第二链路(反射链路)。
在这M+1个整合子信道当中，一方面，确定单元可以将表征第一链路的一个整合子信道H 0的信道矩阵确定为从第一通信设备BS到第二通信设备UE的第一信道(直接信道)H 0的信道矩阵。
另一方面，确定单元可以基于其余M个整合子信道H m(m＝1,…,M)的信道矩阵的转置矩阵的特征向量，确定从第一通信设备BS到智能反射面IRS的第二信道(入射信道)H t的信道矩阵，并且基于这M个整合子信道H m(m＝1,…,M)的信道矩阵的特征向量，确定从智能反射面IRS到第二通信设备UE的第三信道(反射信道)H r的信道矩阵。
作为基于M个整合子信道H m(m＝1,…,M)的信道矩阵的特征向量恢复反射信道H r的示例，例如可以采取下述方式：构造一个N r×M维的矩阵A(N r表示第二通信设备UE的天线数)，记a m为A的第m列，并且对于m＝1,…,M，以H m的第一列作为A的第m列，即a m＝[H m] (:,1)。以此方式构造出的矩阵A即可作为反射信道H r。
此外，作为基于M个整合子信道H m(m＝1,…,M)的信道矩阵的转置矩阵的特征向量恢复入射信道H t的示例，例如可以采取下述方式：首先，构造一个M×N t维的矩阵B(N t表示第一个通信设备BS的天线数)，记
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000047
为B的第m行，并且对于m＝1,…,M，以H m的第一行作为B的第m行，即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000048
以此方式构造出的矩阵B即可作为入射信道H t。
可选地，为了消除矩阵变换中的系数变化导致的影响，可以构造一个M×M维的对角矩阵作为偏置，其M个对角元素依次为M个整合子信道H m(m＝1,…,M)的信道矩阵在(1,1)位置上的元素[H m] (1,1)。在一个优选示例中，可以将作为偏置的上述对角阵与矩阵B的乘积作为入射信道H t，如下述等式(5-2)所示。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000049
例如通过上述方式，可以基于各个整合子信道恢复各个完全信道，即直接信道H 0、入射信道H t、反射信道H r。本领域技术人员可以理解，这样基于整合子信道恢复的完全信道可以与通过现有测量方式(例如直接测量等方式)获得的信道类似地应用于各种处理，这里不再赘述。
为便于理解，下面概述基于各个整合子信道恢复完全信道的上述处理的数学原理。
对于m＝1,…,M的情况，可以将上述等式(5-2)变换如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000050
这里，用t m,k表示行向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000051
的第k个元素(k＝1,…,M)，即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000052
t m,k也是矩阵H t在(m,k)位置上的元素，即t m,k＝[H t] m,k。可以看到，H m的每一列都是r m的倍数，而r m就是H r的 第m列，因此可以直接将H m的第一列t m,1r m提取出来，作为H r的第m列。对各个H m，m＝1,…,M，进行该操作，最终可以得到一个存在乘数模糊的估计反射信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000053
即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000054
从上式可以看出，估计反射信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000055
并不与反射信道H r完全相等，而是存在一个伸缩变换，该变换由下述数学式(5-5)的对角阵表示：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000056
同理，用r k,m表示行向量r m的第k个元素(k＝1,…,M)，即r m＝[r 1,m…r M,m] T，r k,m也是矩阵H r在(k,m)位置上的元素，即r k，m＝[H r] k，m。可以看到，H m的每一行都是
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000057
的倍数，而
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000058
就是H t的第m行，因此可以直接将H m的第一行
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000059
提取出来，作为H t的第m行。对各个H m，m＝1,…,M，进行该操作，最终可以得到一个存在乘数模糊的估计入射信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000060
即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000061
从上式可以看出，估计入射信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000062
也不与入射信道H t完全相等，而是存在一个伸缩变换，该变换由下述数学式(5-7)的对角阵表示：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000063
从
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000064
和
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000065
的表达式中可以看到下述关系：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000066
即，作为对“反射链路”H rΛH t的估计的估计反射链路
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000067
与反射链路H tΛH t并不相等。为了使估计反射链路
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000068
与反射链路H tΛH t相等，需要消除乘数模糊即数学式(5-5)和(5-6)的对角阵导致的影响，即，消除下述数学式(5-9)表示的对角阵的影响
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000069
这里，可以发现数学式(5-9)中代表乘数模糊的对角元r 1,mt m,1恰好是子信道H m在(1,1)位置上的元素，因此在构造
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000070
和
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000071
之后，可以再将数学式(5-9)表示的对角阵作为偏置(即，上述等式(5-2)中的对角阵)例如与
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000072
相乘，即可消除乘数模糊带来的影响。换言之，可以将上述方式构造的估计反射信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000073
作为反射信道H r，将数学式(5-9)表示的对角阵作为偏置例如与上述方式构造的估计入射信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000074
相乘作为入射信道H t，即得到了本补充示例中通过确定单元的恢复处理所得到的反射信道H r和入射信道H t。
以上针对诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例以及本公开的实施例中可以采用的、与智能反射面的反射参数无关的整合子信道的示例，并且进一步结合这样的整合子信道的示例描述了电子设备中的各个单元所执行的处理或处理所涉及的信息/数据/参数的示例。
如以上描述的，根据本实施例的第一配置示例，可以基于使用多组反射参数利用参考信号进行的多次信道测量而获得整合子信道的信道估计。所获得的整合子信道的信道估计可以有利地用于各种后续处理，诸如预编码等，稍后将在第二实施例中对其进行详细描述。
[2.2第二配置示例]
图6是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例的框图。图6所示的第二配置示例涉及图4所示的第一配置示例在第一通信设备中实现的情况，即图4所示的电子设备被包括在第一通信设备中的示例，因此，将在以上对图4所示的第一配置示例的基础上进行以下描述。
如图6所示，电子设备600可以包括获取单元610和确定单元620，其分别类似于图4的电子设备400中的获取单元410和确定单元420。此外，电子设备600还另外包括了发送单元630，其被配置为向第二通信设备和智能反射面发送参考信号。
作为示例，当电子设备600是诸如图3所示的网络侧设备BS时，发送单元630所发送的参考信号例如可以是CSI-RS等，以供例如图3所示的第二通信设备UE基于其接收的、通过直接链路和反射链路到达UE的参考信号(即，直接从BS接收的参考信号以及从IRS接收的、IRS根据反射参数对BS发出的参考信号进行调节后发出的反射信号)，针对这两个链路构成的等效信道进行信道测量，并且获得等效信道的信道信息。
在本示例中，获取单元610例如可以直接从第二通信设备接收经由针对发送单元630所发送的参考信道的多次信道测量获得的、关于作为第一通信设备的电子设备600与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息。作为示例，所接收的每个信道信息可以直接是对等效信道的信道估计，也可以是第二通信设备获得的等效信道的信道状态信息(例如图3所示的第二通信设备UE以CSI报告方式返回的信道状态信息)。在后者情况下，获取单元610可以被配置为基于所获取的多个信道信息，以现有方式分别确定等效信道的多个信道估计例如多个观测信道。
确定单元620可以按照与图4的电子设备400中的确定单元420类似的方式，通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的(与反射参数无关的)多个整合子信道的信道估计，这里不再赘述。
此外，确定单元620可以具有与图5所示的确定单元420类似的示例配置，即可以包括可选的反射参数确定模块和信道估计确定模块(未示出)。在这种情况下，作为第一通信设备的电子设备600的确定单元620可以利用反射参数确定模块确定每次测量中所使用的智能反射面的反射参数，并且可以生成关于反射参数的控制信息。电子设备600可以通过发送单元 610经由控制链路例如与参考信号同时向智能反射面发送该控制信息，以供智能反射面根据相应的反射参数反射参考信号。作为第一通信设备的电子设备600与智能反射面之间用于传输控制信息的控制链路可以通过各种现有技术方式实现，这里不对其进行任何限制。
以上针对诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例。如以上描述的，在本实施例的第二配置示例中，作为发送端的第一通信设备具有第一配置示例中所描述的电子设备的获取单元和确定单元的功能，并且还具有向第二通信设备和智能反射面发送参考信号的功能以及可选地直接向智能反射面发送关于反射参数的控制信息的功能。以此方式，可以避免另外设置单独用于整合子信道的信道估计的电子设备，从而简化了系统设计。
[2.3第三配置示例]
图7是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第三配置示例的框图。图7所示的第三配置示例涉及图4所示的第一配置示例在第二通信设备中实现的情况，即图4所示的电子设备被包括在第二通信设备中的示例，因此，将在以上对图4所示的第一配置示例的基础上进行以下描述。
如图7所示，电子设备700可以包括获取单元710和确定单元720，其分别类似于图4的电子设备400中的获取单元710和确定单元720。此外，电子设备700还另外包括接收单元730，其被配置为从第一通信设备接收参考信号。
作为示例，当电子设备700是诸如图3所示的用户设备UE时，接收单元730所接收的参考信号例如可以是CSI-RS等。获取单元710基于接收单元730所接收的、通过直接链路和反射链路到达UE的参考信号(即，直接从BS接收的参考信号以及从IRS接收的、IRS根据反射参数对BS发出的参考信号进行调节后发出的反射信号)，针对这两个链路构成的等效信道进行信道测量，并且获得等效信道的信道信息。例如，获取单元710通过测量等效信道获得的信道信息可以是通过现有方式确定的等效信道的信道估计(观测信道)。
电子设备700的确定单元720可以按照与图4的电子设备400中的确定单元420类似的方式，通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的(与反射参数无关的)多个整合子信道的信道估计，这 里不再赘述。
此外，确定单元720可以具有与图5所示的确定单元420类似的示例配置，即可以包括可选的反射参数确定模块和信道估计确定模块(未示出)。在这种情况下，作为第二通信设备的电子设备700的确定单元720可以利用反射参数确定模块确定每次测量中所使用的智能反射面的反射参数，并且可以生成关于反射参数的控制信息。电子设备700可以通过未示出的发送单元将控制信息一次性地发送给第一通信设备，以供第一通信设备经由控制链路例如与参考信号同时向智能反射面发送该控制信息，使得智能反射面根据相应的反射参数反射参考信号。替选地，在智能反射面配置了相应处理电路的情况下，电子设备700可以将关于反射参数的控制信息一次性地直接发送智能反射面，以供智能反射面后续在每次反射中使用。
以上针对诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了本公开的第一实施例的电子设备的第三配置示例。如以上描述的，在本实施例的第三配置示例中，作为接收端的第二通信设备具有第一配置示例中所描述的电子设备的获取单元和确定单元的功能，并且还具有从第一接收设备接收参考信号的功能。以此方式，可以避免另外设置单独用于整合子信道的信道估计的电子设备，从而简化了系统设计。
[2.4信息交互流程的示例]
接下来，将参照图8和图9描述将第一实施例的电子设备应用于智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统时的信息交互流程的示例。
图8是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的信息交互流程的一个示例的流程图。
在该示例中，利用诸如参照图6描述的电子设备600作为第一通信设备，并且其采用了网络侧设备BS的形式；以用户设备UE作为第二通信设备；BS与US之间设置了智能反射面IRS(即，各个设备之间例如具有图3所示的关系)。注意，尽管这里以BS与UE分别作为第一、第二通信设备而描述两者之间的交互作为示例，但是应理解本公开并不限于此。
如图8所示，在步骤S800中，BS确定L次信道测量中要使用的L组反射参数。接着，在步骤S810-1中，BS向UE和IRS发送参考信号，并且同时在步骤S820-1中例如经由控制链路向IRS发送关于第1组反射参数的控制信息，使得IRS根据所接收的反射参数反射参考信号。接收到来自BS的参考信号和来自IRS的反射信号的UE通过适当的信道测量(例 如以现有技术的方式)获得等效信道的第1个信道信息。在步骤S830-1中，BS从UE获取第1个信道信息。上述步骤S810-1、S820-1、S830-1可以统称为第1次信道测量。以此方式重复多次信道测量，直到完成了预先确定的L次信道测量为止(在后续每次信道测量的各个步骤例如步骤S810-2、S820-2、S830-2…S810-L、S820-L、S830-L执行与第1次信道测量中类似的处理)。
接着，在步骤S840中，BS通过对L次信道测量中使用的L组反射参数与所获取的L个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与IRS的反射参数一起表征等效信道的(与反射参数无关的)多个整合子信道的信道估计。
图9是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的信息交互流程的另一示例的流程图。
在该示例中，以网络侧设备BS作为第一通信设备；利用诸如参照图7描述的电子设备700作为第二通信设备，并且其采用了用户设备UE的形式；BS与US之间设置了智能反射面IRS。注意，尽管这里以BS与UE分别作为第一、第二通信设备而描述两者之间的交互作为示例，但是应理解本公开并不限于此。
如图9所示，在步骤S900中，作为第二通信设备的UE确定L次信道测量中要使用的L组反射参数，并且可选地在步骤S910将关于反射参数的控制信息发送第一通信设备BS。接着，BS向UE和IRS发送参考信号，并且同时例如经由控制链路向IRS发送关于第1组反射参数的控制信息，使得IRS根据所接收的反射参数反射参考信号。在步骤S920-1中，接收到来自BS的参考信号和来自IRS的反射信号的UE通过适当的信道测量(例如以现有技术的方式)获取等效信道的第1个信道信息。上述步骤S910之后的(不包括步骤S910本身)到步骤S920-1的处理可以统称为第1次信道测量。以此方式重复多次信道测量，直到完成了预先确定的L次信道测量为止(在每次信道测量的各个步骤例如步骤S910-2、.,..S910-L等执行与第1信道测量中类似的处理)。
接着，在步骤S930中，UE通过对L次信道测量中使用的L组反射参数与所获取的L个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与IRS的反射参数一起表征等效信道的(与反射参数无关的)多个整合子信道的信道估计。
应理解，以上参照图8和图9描述的交互过程仅为示例，并且本领域技术人员可根据本公开的原理对上述交互过程进行适当的修改。
例如，图8中BS和UE的位置可以互换。即，可以将具有诸如参照图6描述的电子设备600的配置的UE作为发送端，并且利用BS作为接收端，并且由具有诸如参照图6描述的电子设备600的配置的UE执行第一通信设备的处理，由BS执行第二通信设备的处理。类似地，图9中BS和UE的位置可以互换。即，可以将UE作为发送端，并且利用具有诸如参照图7描述的电子设备700的配置的BS作为接收端，由UE执行第一通信设备的处理，具有诸如参照图7描述的电子设备700的配置的BS执行第二通信设备的处理。
此外，例如，针对图9中的示例交互，可以由未示出的诸如参照图4描述的电子设备400实现诸如步骤S900的确定反射参数的处理以及步骤S930的确定整合子信道的信道估计的处理，并且与图9所示的BS和UE进行必要的信息交互(例如在步骤S910中向BS提供关于反射参数的控制信息、在步骤S920-L之后另外地从UE获取等效信道的L个信道信息)，这里不再赘述。
<3.第二实施例的配置示例>
针对诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，利用根据第一实施例的电子设备所求解的与反射参数无关的多个整合子信道的信道估计，可以计算能够用于智能反射面的反射参数以及能够用于对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码的预编码矩阵。接下来，将描述基于上述整合子信道的信道估计来计算反射参数以及预编码矩阵的第二实施例。
[3.1第一配置示例]
图10是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例的框图。
如图10所示，电子设备1000可以包括第一计算单元1010和第二计算单元1020。电子设备1000可以通过稍后描述的这两个计算单元的处理，基于利用例如以上参照图4至图7描述的电子设备400、电子设备600和电子设备700中的任一者获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算能够用于智能反射面的反射参数以及能够用于对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码的预编码矩阵。
这里，电子设备1000的各个单元都可以包括在处理电路中。需要说明的是，电子设备1000既可以包括一个处理电路，也可以包括多个处理电路。进一步，处理电路可以包括各种分立的功能单元以执行各种不同的 功能和/或操作。需要说明的是，这些功能单元可以是物理实体或逻辑实体，并且不同称谓的单元可能由同一个物理实体实现。
电子设备1000的第一计算单元1010可以利用例如以上参照图4至图7描述的电子设备400、600和700中的任一者获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算第一预编码矩阵。
如前所述，发明人提出的信道重组整合的发明构思可以将诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的信道重组整合成与反射参数无关的多个整合子信道，并利用这些整合子信道与智能反射面的反射参数一起表示整个等效信道。因此，当计算用于第一通信设备的数据信号的预编码矩阵时，电子设备1000可以先不考虑智能反射面的反射参数的影响，而是首先通过第一计算单元1010的处理将多个整合子信道视为预编码意义上的有效信道，并基于这些整合子信道的信道估计计算第一预编码矩阵。
第一计算单元1010可以利用各种现有方式基于整合子信道的信道估计而计算第一预编码矩阵，以使得可以优化系统性能。举例而言，可以通过以第一预编码矩阵对要发送的数据信号预编码之后多个整合子信道的等效信道容量最大化来确定第一预编码矩阵。
电子设备1000的第二计算单元1020可以基于第一计算单元1010通过上述方式计算的第一预编码矩阵，计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵(用于第一通信设备的数据信号的预编码矩阵)，使得基于所计算的反射系数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵相似。第二计算单元1020所计算出的反射参数例如可以包括智能反射面的各个反射单元对信号进行幅度调节的幅度调节参数和/或进行相位调节的相位调节参数。
这里，在利用第一计算单元1010以排除智能反射面的反射参数的影响的方式计算了针对多个整合子信道(预编码意义上的等效信道)的第一预编码矩阵之后，电子设备1000可以利用第二计算单元1020基于待定的智能反射面的反射参数与待定的第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵生成等效预编码矩阵，并且在所生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵相似时确定智能反射面的反射参数与第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵的取值。
第二计算单元1020按照上述方式确定的智能反射面的反射参数和第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵可以近似表示例如能够使等效信道容量最 大化的第一预编码矩阵，因此，当将上述反射参数和第二预编码矩阵分别应用于诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统时，同样可以获得等效信道容量最大化的效果。换言之，例如利用各种现有方式基于整合子信道的信道估计而计算可以优化系统性能的第一预编码矩阵之后，能够近似表示该第一预编码矩阵的反射参数和第二预编码矩阵可以使得智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统的系统性能得到同样的优化。
接下来，将返回参照<1.概述>中描述的图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统及其等效信道的示例，基于此前<2.第一实施例的配置示例>的[2.1第一配置示例]的(整合子信道的示例)部分描述的示例整合子信道，进一步说明电子设备1000的各个示例单元实现的示例处理。
在图3的示例中，假设第一通信设备BS要发送给第二通信设备UE的符号为x(x是一个N s×1维的向量，N s是信息流数)，第一通信设备BS采用的预编码矩阵(第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵)为W(W是一个N t×N s维的矩阵，N t表示第一通信设备的天线数，N s表示信息流数)，并且发射功率为ρ。第二通信设备UE接收到的符号为y＝y d+y r+z，其中，y是一个N r×1维的向量(N r表示第二通信设备的天线数)，y d是通过作为直接链路的第一链路(BS与UE之间的直接链路)接收的部分，y r是通过作为反射链路的第二链路(BS经由IRS到达UE的链路)接收的部分，z是接收端的UE的加性噪声。基于以上定义，可以将y d和y r分别表示如下
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000075
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000076
其中，Λ是一个M×M的对角矩阵，代表IRS的M个反射单元分别对其反射信号进行的幅度和/或相位调节。这里，将以IRS的反射单元仅进行相位调节作为示例进行描述，因此对角矩阵Λ采用此前在<1.概述>中描述的等式(1)的形式：对角矩阵Λ的对角元(每个反射参数)采用了模长为1的相位调节系数
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000077
(m＝1,2,…M)。根据(16)和(17)，可以将第二通信设备UE接收到的符号表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000078
利用此前在<1.概述>中描述的等式(2)H eq(Λ)＝H 0+H rΛH t，可以将(18)转换为下述等式(19)的形式：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000079
对于MIMO系统，通常以预编码之后的等效信道容量衡量预编码性能。基于以上等式(19)，预编码之后的等效信道容量可以表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000080
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000081
是N r阶的单位矩阵，σ 2是噪声功率，N r表示第二通信设备UE的天线数。电子设备1000的第一计算单元1010与第二计算单元1020所执行的各种处理目的就在于基于例如以上参照图4至图7描述的电子设备400、600和700中的任一者获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算智能反射面的反射参数(Λ)以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵(W)，以使得C IRS-MIMO(Λ,W)最大化。
这里，以此前在<2.第一实施例的配置示例>的第一配置示例中参照等式(5)描述的(M+1)个整合子信道H m作为多个整合子信道(m＝0,1,2,…M)的示例，其中，每个整合子信道H m具有Nr*Nt的矩阵形式，N r表示第二通信设备的天线数，N t表示第一通信设备的天线数，考虑利用这些整合子信道表示(20)所示的等效信道容量。
基于这样的(M+1)个整合子信道H m，等效信道可以具有<2.第一实施例的配置示例>的第一配置示例中的等式(6)的形式，即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000082
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000083
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000084
是通过为智能反射面在一次反射中使用的一组反射参数添加一个预定常数而获得的扩展反射向量。本示例中，采用的反射参数不涉及相位调节(即，反射参数的模为1)，因此扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000085
例如具有<2.第一实施例的配置示例>的第一配置示例中的等式(4)中
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000086
的形式。
将基于扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000087
的等效信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000088
带入等式(20)，可以将等效信道容量化为如下形式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000089
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000091
其中，H eff＝[H 0…H M]，其可以被视为预编码意义上的有效信道。接着，将利用第一实施例中的电子设备400、600和700之一可以获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000092
而确定的有效信道H eff的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000093
带入以上(21’)，可以确定
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000094
从等式(21)至(22)可以看出，当利用了此前参照等式(5)描述的(M+1)个整合子信道H m作为多个整合子信道的示例时，由于电子设备1000已经获得了这些整合子信道的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000095
进而可以获得了这些整合子信道在编码意义上的有效信道H eff的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000096
因此，可以使得电子设备1000需要解决的使C IRS-MIMO(Λ,W)最大化的问题变为基于信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000097
使
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000098
最大化的问题。
鉴于以上情况，在本示例中，电子设备1000的第一计算单元1010可以先不考虑智能反射面的反射参数的影响，而将多个整合子信道视为预编码意义上的一个有效信道，并基于该有效信道的信道估计(例如以上描述的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000099
)计算第一预编码矩阵P 1。
换言之，可以用第一预编码矩阵P 1代替等式(22)中的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000100
从而可以得到下述等式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000101
这里，由于第一预编码矩阵P 1用于取代等式(22)中的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000102
因此该矩阵具有与
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000103
的运算结果相同的形式(相同的维度)，这里不再赘述。第一计算子单元1010可以例如基于以上等式(23)，利用各种传统预编码方案通过使C Ref(P 1)最大化，而根据基于多个整合子信道构建的、预编码意义上的有效信道的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000104
求得预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000105
作为第一预编码矩阵P 1的最优值，其例具有下述等式(24)的形式。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000106
当获得例如以上等式(24)的第一预编码矩阵(第一预编码矩阵的最优值)
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000107
之后，在一个优选实施例中，电子设备1000的第二计算单元1020可以被配置为根据扩展反射向量与第二预编码矩阵的内积而生成用于近似表示该第一预编码矩阵的等效预编码矩阵，其中，通过为智能反射面在一次反射中使用的一组反射参数添加一个预定常数而获得该扩展反射向量。
例如，第二计算单元1020根据扩展反射向量与第二预编码矩阵的内积而生成的等效预编码矩阵P eff可以具有下述形式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000108
其中，扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000109
例如具有等式(4)的M+1维向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000110
的形式，第二预编码矩阵W例如是N t×N s维的矩阵形式，N t表示发送端的第一通信设备的天线数，N s是第一通信设备的信息流数。
作为使得例如等式(25)形式的等效预编码矩阵能够近似表示第一计算单元1010所计算的诸如以上等式(24)形式的第一预编码矩阵的示例方式，第二计算单元1020可以被配置为计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射参数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵之间的F范数最小。
换言之，第二计算单元1020可以基于等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵之间的F范数衡量二者之间的相似度，并且在F范数最小时，确定所生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵最相似，从而确定生成该等效预编码矩阵的智能反射面的反射参数与第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵的取值为所需的最优值。
例如，第二计算单元1020可以计算满足下述等式(26)的扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000111
和第二预编码矩阵W的最优值
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000112
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000113
表示等效预编码矩阵P eff与第一预编码矩阵(第一预编码矩阵的最优值)
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000114
之间的F范数最小时，所确定的扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000115
和第二预编码矩阵W的最优值。可以根据以此方式获得的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000116
确定智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵。这里，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000117
代表IRS-MIMO预编码设计的可行域，用来规范
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000118
和W应该满足的约束，‖·‖ F表示矩阵的F范数(Frobenius范数)。
注意，尽管(26)式中的优化问题在一些情况下不一定能够求得最优解
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000119
的解析表达式，但基于以上给出的设计准则，本领域技术人员可以采用各种方式适当地确定
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000120
的最优值，这里不再赘述。
在以上示例中，认为智能反射面采用的反射参数不涉及相位调节，因此扩展反射向量具有等式(4)的形式。如果所采用的反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节，则可以为等式(4)的扩展反射向量中的每个元素添加一个幅度调节系数a m而变为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000121
(m＝1,2,...,M)，这种情况下，由于反射参数的模长不再为1，为了获得扩展反射向量而在等式(4)所添加的预定常数可以是一个任意值而不再限于1。除此之外，本示例中的内容将类似地适用于反射参数同时涉及幅度和相位调节的情况，即，通过等式(16)-(26)确定第一通信设备的预编码矩阵以及智能反射面的反射参数的方式将会类似地适用。
以上针对诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例，并且进一步结合所采用的整合子信道的具体示例描述了电子设备中的各个单元所执行的处理的示例。如以上描述的，根据本实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例，可以基于预先获得的整合子信道的信道估计，计算用于第一通信设备的预编码矩阵以及智能反射面的反射参数，这样计算的反射参数和预编码矩阵可以有利于优化系统系能。
[3.2第二配置示例]
图11是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例的框图。图11所示的第二配置示例涉及图10所示的第一配置示例的进一步改进，因此，将在以上对图10所示的第一配置示例的基础上进行以下描述。
如图11所示，电子设备1100可以包括第一计算单元1110和第二计算单元1120，其分别类似于图10的电子设备1000中的第一计算单元1010和第二计算单元1020。此外，电子设备1100还另外包括了预编码单元1130， 其被配置利用所计算的第二预编码矩阵，对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码。
作为示例，电子设备1100例如可以被包括在诸如图3所示的网络侧设备BS的第一通信设备中。即，作为第一通信设备的电子设备1100本身计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的预编码矩阵。在这种情况下，电子设备1100在诸如图3所示系统中作为第一通信设备通信时，可以经由未示出的发送单元向智能反射面和第二通信设备发送经由预编码单元1130根据第二计算单元1120所计算的第二预编码矩阵而预编码的数据信号，同时可选地经由控制链路向智能反射面发送第二计算单元1120所计算的反射参数。
以上针对诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例。如以上描述的，在本实施例的第二配置示例中，电子设备可以对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码，并且例如可以被包括在第一通信设备中。以此方式，利用所生成的预编码矩阵改进了智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统的系统性能。
另外，可以理解，尽管在本说明书和附图中分开描述了用于计算整合子信道的信道估计的第一实施例和用于基于整合子信道的信道估计计算预编码矩阵的第二实施例，但在本公开内容的基础上，可以将这两个实施例适当地彼此结合。
例如，第一实施例的第二示例配置(图6所示的电子设备600)与第二实施例的第二示例配置(图11所示的电子设备1100)可以结合在一起，并且可以在诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中用作第一通信设备。该设备可以在获得整合子信道的信道估计之后确定预编码矩阵以及反射参数，并且可以据此执行要发送的数据信号的预编码，可选地向智能反射面和第二通信设备发送预编码的数据信号，同时可选地例如经由控制链路向智能反射面发送所确定的反射参数。
<4.第三实施例的配置示例>
接下来，描述诸如图3所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中第一、第二通信设备之间的直接链路受到遮挡的特殊情况，并描述该特殊情况下基于发明人提出的整合子信道的构思计算预编码矩阵的第三实施例。第三实施例所针对的场景是图3的简化场景，并且第三实施例所提出的计算预编码矩阵的方式是基于第二实施例得到的简化方式，因此，以下关于第三 实施例的描述将在此前的相关描述的基础上进行。
[4.1无直接链路时的预编码计算]
首先，将参照图12描述发明人针对智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中第一、第二通信设备之间的不存在直接链路的特殊情况所提出的计算第一通信设备的预编码矩阵以及智能反射面的反射参数的简化算法。
图12是用于说明特定情况下的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的等效信道的示意图，其示出了系统中直接链路受到遮挡的示例情况，即图3所示的示例中第一、第二通信设备之间的直接链路H 0≈0的特例。在图12的示例中，无线通信系统包括第一通信设备BS、第二通信设备UE、以及两者之间的设置在建筑物上的智能反射面IRS。第一通信设备BS与第二通信设备UE之间的直接链路受到遮挡，反射链路信道视距占优。此时，由于不存在直接链路，等效信道以及发明人提出的诸如等式(5)形式的整合子信道均可得到简化。发明人发现，在这种情况下，各个子信道可以由相应的阵列导向矢量进行表示并进行相应处理，这有利于进一步简化第一通信设备的预编码矩阵的计算。
这里，可以将诸如图12所示的智能反射面IRS、发射端的第一通信设备BS、接收端的第二通信设备UE各自视为一个平面天线阵列，并基于各个天线阵列的导向矢量，在波束域中利用下述等式(27)表示从BS到IRS的信道H t以及从IRS到UE的信道H r：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000122
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000123
在等式(27)中，β t和β r分别表示对应信道(链路)的路径损耗。
此外，不失一般性，以
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000124
表示平面型天线阵列在目标通信设备相对于该天线阵列的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000125
方向的导向矢量，其可以表征天线阵列的阵元位置不同所导致的平面波的相位延迟。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000126
的维度由天线阵列的阵元(天线数)确定，其中每个元素可以是一个模长为1的、具有相应的相位的复数。这里，θ和
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000127
分别表示目标通信设备相对于天线阵列中的阵元关于水平方向的角度和关于垂直方向的角度，因此
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000128
可以表示目标通信设备相对于天线阵列(其中的阵元)在空间上的方位并且可以称为方位角。
不失一般性，给定一个有N个阵元的均匀平面阵列，其水平方向和垂直方向的维度分别为N H和N V，满足N HN V＝N，则导向矢量可以表示为：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000129
其中，h，v为自然数，并且0<h≤N H-1，0<v≤N V-1，D是阵元之间的间距，λ是载波的波长。从以上等式(28)可知，只要知道目标通信设备相对于天线阵列的方位角
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000130
即可确定天线阵列在该方位的导向矢量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000131
在等式(27)中，为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000132
添加的下标M、N t、N r分别表示该导向矢量所表示的天线阵列(即，智能反射面IRS、发射端的第一通信设备BS、接收端的第二通信设备UE各自的天线阵列)的阵元的个数(即，天线数)。为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000133
中的θ、
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000134
添加的上标AOA或AOD表示该导向矢量为相应的天线阵列关于出发角(Angle of departure，AOD)或到达角(Angle of arrival，AOA)的导向矢量，并且为其中的θ、
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000135
添加的下标t或r表示所属于的信道(即，发送侧的信道H t或者接收侧的信道H r)。
基于上述定义，可以了解，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000136
表示智能反射面IRS在第一通信设备BS相对于智能反射面IRS的到达角
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000137
方向的导向矢量(下文中也称为第一导向矢量)；
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000138
表示智能反射面IRS在第二通信设备UE相对于智能反射面IRS的出发角
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000139
方向的导向矢量(下文中也称为第二导向矢量)；
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000140
表示第一通信设备BS在智能反射面IRS相对于第一通信设备BS的出发角
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000141
方向的导向矢量(下文中也称为第三导向矢量)；
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000142
表示第二通信设备UE在智能反射面IRS相对于第二通信设备UE的到达角
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000143
方向的导向矢量(下文中也称为第四导向矢量)。
基于上述第一至第四导向矢量，以等式(27)的方式表示了图12所示的无线通信系统中的信道。
接着，返回参照以此前在<2.第一实施例的配置示例>的第一配置示例 中描述的等式(5)形式的整合子信道H m。这里，由于第一、第二通信设备之间的直接链路H 0≈0，因此等式(5)退化成以下(5’)的形式：
H m＝[H r] (:,m)[H t] (m,:),m＝1,2,...,M    (5’)
将等式(27)带入等式(5’)，可以得到此时的整合子信道H m的表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000144
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000145
表示智能反射面在第二通信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000146
的共轭转置
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000147
的第m个元素，c m表示智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000148
的第m个元素。基于等式(29)，可以得到例如图12所示的系统中第一、第二通信设备之间(在预编码意义上)的有效信道为：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000149
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000150
且为简便起见，省略了
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000151
和
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000152
的括号相关部分。
这里，如以此前在<3.第二实施例的配置示例>的第一配置示例中参照等式(22)所描述的那样，当利用具有等式(5)形式的整合子信道H m作为多个整合子信道时，由于能够获得这些整合子信道的信道估计、进而可以获得这些整合子信道在编码意义上的有效信道H eff的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000153
因此，可以使得为了计算第一通信设备的预编码矩阵而需要解决的使预编码之后等效信道容量最大化的问题变为基于有效信道H eff的信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000154
而使
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000155
最大化的问题。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000156
换言之，可以利用诸如以上参照图10描述的第二实施例的电子设备1000的各个单元所进行的处理，通过基于有效信道的信道估计(例如信道估计
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000157
)计算使等效信道容量最大化的第一预编码矩阵P 1、再基于扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000158
与用于第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵W的内积
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000159
而生成用于近似表示该第一预编码矩阵的等效预编码矩阵。例如，在该等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵P 1之间的F范数最小时，可以确定扩展反射向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000160
和第二预编码矩阵W的最优值，进而确定了智能反射面的反射参数和第一通信设备的预编码矩阵。
以上确定智能反射面的反射参数和第一通信设备的预编码矩阵的方式对于本实施例所关注的诸如图12所示的特定情况同样适用。而且，由于在该特定情况下第一、第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路(即，图3的示例中的H 0≈0)，因此以上等式(22)中的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000161
扩展反射向量可以退化为反射向量μ，第一通信设备的预编码矩阵W可以退化为预编码向量w，相应地第一预编码矩阵P 1退化为第一预编码向量p 1。
因此，在诸如图12所示的特定情况下，第二实施例中计算预编码矩阵的方式将变为首先求出使等效信道容量最大化的第一预编码向量p 1，然后计算能够近似表示该第一预编码向量的预编码设计(μ,w)。
更具体地，在这种情况下，预编码之后的等效信道容量的表述退化为以下形式：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000162
此时，以第一预编码矩阵P 1的退化形式即第一预编码向量p 1代替等式(22’)中的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000163
从而可以得到类似等式(23)的下述等式(23’)
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000164
由于第一预编码向量p 1用于取代等式(22’)中的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000165
因此该向量具有与
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000166
的运算结果相同的形式(相同的维度)，这里不再赘述。
对于以上等式(23’)形式的等效信道容量，由于需要求解的对象已变为第一预编码向量p 1(而非矩阵)，因此，可以根据奇异值分解(Singular value decomposition，SVD)预编码准则设计出使得C Ref(p 1)最大化的第一预编码向量。
在这种情况下，以H eff取代等式(23’)中的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000167
根据SVD准则，首先计算H eff HH eff的特征向量，记所求的特征向量为f，对应的特征值为γ，则有
H eff HH efff＝γf    (31)
将等式(30)中的H eff的表达式代入等式(31)，可得
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000168
若要求上式(32)成立，则需要
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000169
其中l为一个待定的向量，故上式(32)可进一步化为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000170
即，l是矩阵t *t T的特征向量，不失一般性，可取l＝t *，从而可以得到
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000171
考虑到功率约束，SVD预编码准则下使得C Ref(p 1)最大化的第一预编码向量p 1的最优值
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000172
如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000173
在获得上述(35)形式的第一预编码向量(第一预编码向量的最优值)之后，可以根据反射向量与智能反射面的第一预编码向量的内积而生成的等效预编码向量来近似表示该第一预编码向量，并且在所生成的等效预编码向量与第一预编码向量最相似时，确定生成该等效预编码向量的反射向量与第二预编码向量的取值为所需的最优值。
例如，根据反射向量μ与第二预编码向量w的内积而生成的等效预编码向量p eff可以具有从等式(25)变形的下述(25’)形式
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000174
可以基于等效预编码向量p eff与第一预编码向量(第一预编码向量的最优值)
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000175
之间的F范数衡量二者之间的相似度，并且在F范数最小时，确定反射向量μ与第二预编码向量w的取值为所需的最优值。例如，可以计算满足作为等式(26)的变形的下述等式(26’)的最优值
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000176
其中，(μ opt,w opt)表示当上述F范数最小时，所确定的μ和w的最优值。这里，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000177
代表IRS-MIMO预编码设计的可行域，用来规范μ和w应该满足的约束，‖·‖ F表示F范数(Frobenius范数)。
将等式(34)和等式(25’)带入等式(26)，可以获得下述表示：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000178
显然，当满足下述等式(37)和(38)的要求时，有
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000179
即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000180
达到最小。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000181
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000182
在等式(37)中，以智能反射面在第二通信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000183
的第m个元素b m与智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000184
的共轭转置
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000185
的第m个元素
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000186
的乘积 (也可将其视为第二导向矢量与第一导向矢量的共轭的对应元素的乘积)，作为智能反射面的反射向量的最优值μ opt中的各个反射参数。换言之，可以将第二导向矢量的转置与第一导向矢量的共轭转置的哈达玛积作为智能反射面的反射向量的最优值μ opt(即，以该最优值向量的元素作为反射参数)。在等式(38)中，将第一通信设备BS在智能反射面IRS相对于第一通信设备BS的出发角方向的第三导向矢量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000187
除以第一通信设备的天线数N t，作为所计算的预编码向量的最优值w opt。
从以上等式(37)和(38)可以看出，在这种计算预编码向量和反射参数的方式中，(μ opt,w opt)只和导向矢量有关、即只和方位角有关，因此只需要知道发射端的第一通信设备与智能反射面之间以及智能反射面与接收端的第二通信设备之间的出发角和到达角即可进行预编码，这样的计算复杂度低，实际可操作性很强。
注意，在本示例的情况下，由于反射向量μ是中间变量，因此即使反射向量μ修改为涵盖幅度调节的形式(每个元素的模不为1而是带有待定的幅度调节系数)，也不会影响等式(37)和(38)的计算。即，以上算法可以不加调整地适用于反射参数包括幅度调节系数和相位调节系数的情况。
基于以上发明构思，发明人提出了第三实施例的电子设备，其能够基于相应天线阵列(第一通信设备、第二通信设备或智能反射面)在目标通信设备相对于该天线阵列的出发角/到达角方向的导向矢量计算第一通信设备的预编码向量以及智能反射面的反射参数。接下来，将描述该电子设备的配置示例。
[4.2第一配置示例]
图13是示出根据本公开的第三实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例的框图。
如图13所示，电子设备1300可以包括反射计算单元1310和预编码计算单元1320。
这里，电子设备1300的各个单元都可以包括在处理电路中。需要说明的是，电子设备1300既可以包括一个处理电路，也可以包括多个处理电路。进一步，处理电路可以包括各种分立的功能单元以执行各种不同的 功能和/或操作。需要说明的是，这些功能单元可以是物理实体或逻辑实体，并且不同称谓的单元可能由同一个物理实体实现。
作为示例，图13所示的电子设备1300可以应用于诸如此前参照图12描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统。以下，将继续结合图12的示例描述电子设备1300及其功能单元所实现的处理。
针对诸如图12所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，电子设备1300的反射计算单元1310可以基于智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量以及智能反射面在第二通信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量，计算位于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面的反射参数，其中，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路。
作为示例，反射计算单元1310所计算的反射参数可以包括智能反射面的各个反射单元对信号进行幅度调节的幅度参数和/或进行相位调节的相位参数。
此外，电子设备1300的预编码计算单元1320可以基于第一通信设备在智能反射面相对于第一通信设备的出发角方向的第三导向矢量，计算第一通信设备的预编码向量。
在诸如图12所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中，第一、第二通信设备和智能反射面各自可以采用平面阵列天线进行信号的收发。相应地，电子设备1300的反射计算单元1310和预编码计算单元1320的上述中所涉及的第一至第三导向矢量中的每一个所涉及的出发角或到达角各自包括水平方向上和垂直方向上的出发角或到达角。换言之，第一至第三导向矢量中的每一个都可以是基于水平和垂直两个方向的方位角的平面阵列导向矢量。
举例而言，第一至第三导向矢量可以分别是以上在[4.1无直接链路时的预编码计算]中参照等式(27)描述的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000188
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000189
优选地，反射计算单元1310可以被配置为计算第二导向矢量与第一导向矢量的共轭的对应元素的乘积，作为智能反射面的各个反射参数。即，反射计算单元1310可以按照以上等式(37)的方式，计算智能反射面的各个反射参数。
此外，优选地，预编码计算单元1320可以被配置为将第三导向矢量除以第一通信设备的天线数，作为所计算的预编码向量。即，预编码计算单元1320可以按照以上等式(38)的方式，计算智能反射面的各个预编码向量。
以上针对诸如图12所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了本公开的第三实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例。根据本实施例的电子设备的第一配置示例，能够基于第一通信设备和智能反射面的关于相应的出发角或到达角的第一至第三导向矢量计算第一通信设备的预编码向量以及智能反射面的反射参数。
换言之，只需要知道发射端的第一通信设备与智能反射面之间、以及智能反射面与接收端的第二通信设备之间的出发角和到达角即可进行预编码，这样的计算复杂度低，实际可操作性很强。并且，与第二实施例类似地，所计算出的预编码向量和反射参数可以有利于优化系统系能。
[4.3第二配置示例]
图14是示出根据本公开的第三实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例的框图。图14所示的第二配置示例涉及图13所示的第一配置示例的进一步改进，因此，将在以上对图13所示的第一配置示例的基础上进行以下描述。
如图14所示，电子设备1400可以包括反射计算单元1410和预编码计算单元1420，其分别类似于图13的电子设备1300中的反射计算单元1310和预编码计算单元1320。此外，电子设备1400还另外包括了预编码单元1430，其被配置利用所计算的预编码向量，对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码。
作为示例，电子设备1400例如可以被包括在诸如图12所示的网络侧设备BS的第一通信设备中。即，作为第一通信设备的电子设备1400本身计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的预编码向量。在这种情况下，电子设备1400在诸如图12所示系统中作为第一通信设备通信时，可以经由未示出的发送单元向智能反射面和第二通信设备发送经由预编码单元1430根据预编码计算单元1420所计算的预编码向量而预编码的数据信号，同时可选地经由控制链路向智能反射面发送参数计算单元1310所计算的反射参数。
以上针对诸如图12所示的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，描述了 本公开的第二实施例的电子设备的第二配置示例。如以上描述的，在本实施例的第二配置示例中，电子设备可以对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码，并且例如可以被包括在第一通信设备中。以此方式，利用所生成的预编码矩阵改进了智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统的系统性能。
<5.第一至第三实施例的方法实施例>
[5.1第一实施例的方法实施例]
接下来将详细描述根据本公开第一实施例的无线通信方法。
图15是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图。图15所示的方法例如可以应用于诸如此前参照图3描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统。
如图15所示，在步骤S1501中，获取经由多次信道测量获得的、关于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息，在每次信道测量中，第二通信设备基于所接收的从第一通信设备发送的参考信号、以及第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面使用相应的一组反射参数反射该参考信号而发出的反射信号而获得一个信道信息。
接着，在步骤S1502中，通过利用多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征等效信道的多个整合子信道的信道估计。
作为示例，等效信道可以包括从第一通信设备到第二通信设备的第一链路以及从第一通信设备经由智能反射面到第二通信设备的第二链路。此外，例如，智能反射面的反射信号可以是智能反射面的各个反射单元根据各自的反射参数对参考信号进行幅度和/或相位调节后发出的。
在一个示例中，在步骤S1501中所获取的多个信道信息包括等效信道的多个信道状态信息。在这种情况下，在步骤S1501还可以包括下述处理：基于所获取的多个信道信息，分别确定等效信道的多个信道估计。
替选地，在一个示例中，在步骤S1501中所获取的多个信道信息包括等效信道的多个信道估计。
作为示例，在步骤S1502中进行的联合处理可以包括：将基于多组反射参数获得的多个扩展反射向量构造的训练矩阵的逆矩阵与基于多个信道估计构造的观测矩阵相乘，以确定各个整合子信道的信道矩阵，其中，通过为多组反射参数中的每组反射参数分别添加一个预定常数而获得上 述多个扩展反射向量。
作为示例，智能反射面可以包括M个反射单元并在每次反射中使用与M个反射单元对应的一组M个反射参数，M为大于1的自然数。
在这种情况下，在步骤S1502中进行的联合处理中，可以通过所述相乘确定共M+1个整合子信道的信道矩阵。优选地，所进行的信道测量的次数或反射参数的组数L大于或等于M+1。
在步骤S1502中进行的联合处理期间，可以将每个整合子信道表示为N r*N t的信道矩阵，其中，N r表示第二通信设备的天线数，N t表示第一通信设备的天线数。
优选地，在每次反射中使用的M个反射参数的取值可以选自L阶离散傅里叶变换矩阵的矩阵元素当中除了第一行以外的M个矩阵元素。替选地，每次反射中使用的M个反射参数的取值可以选自L阶哈达玛矩阵的矩阵元素当中除了第一行以外的M个矩阵元素。
可选地，尽管图15中未示出，但该方法可以在步骤S1501之前附加地包括用于确定每次测量中所使用的智能反射面的反射参数的步骤。此外，该方法还可以包括向智能反射面(直接或间接)提供关于反射参数的控制信息的步骤。
在一个示例中，第一通信设备可以是网络侧设备，并且第二通信设备可以是用户设备。
可选地，图15所示的方法的各个步骤可以在第一通信设备中执行，并且该方法还可以包括通过第一通信设备向第二通信设备和智能反射面发送参考信号的步骤。
此外，可选地，图15所示的方法的各个步骤可以在第二通信设备中执行，并且该方法还可以包括通过第二通信设备接收来自第一通信设备的参考信号和来自智能反射面的反射信号的步骤。
根据本公开的实施例，执行上述方法的主体可以是根据本公开的第一实施例的电子设备400、600或700，因此前文中关于电子设备400、600或700的实施例的各种方面均适用于此。
[5.2第二实施例的方法实施例]
接下来将详细描述根据本公开的第二实施例的无线通信方法。
图16是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图。图16所示的方法例如可以应用于诸如此前参照图3描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统。
如图16所示，在步骤S1601中，根据利用第一实施例的电子设备(诸如电子设备400、600或700)或第一实施例的无线通信方法(诸如图15所示的方法)获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算第一预编码矩阵。接着，在步骤S1602中，基于第一预编码矩阵，计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射系数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵相似。
举例而言，通过步骤S1602的处理所计算出的反射参数例如可以包括智能反射面的各个反射单元对信号进行幅度调节的幅度参数和/或进行相位调节的相位参数。
作为示例，在步骤S1602中，可以根据扩展反射向量与第二预编码矩阵的内积而生成等效预编码矩阵，其中，通过为智能反射面在一次反射中使用的一组反射参数添加一个预定常数而获得该扩展反射向量。
此外，作为示例，在步骤S1602中，可以计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射参数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵之间的F范数最小。
可选地，尽管图16中未示出，但该方法可以在步骤S1602之后附加地包括用于利用所计算的第二预编码矩阵对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码的步骤。
根据本公开的实施例，执行上述方法的主体可以是根据本公开的第二实施例的电子设备1000或1100，因此前文中关于电子设备1000或1100的实施例的各种方面均适用于此。
[5.3第三实施例的方法实施例]
接下来将详细描述根据本公开的第三实施例的无线通信方法。
图17是示出根据本公开的第三实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图。图17所示的方法例如可以应用于诸如此前参照图12描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统。
如图17所示，在步骤S1701中，基于智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量以及智能反射面在第二通 信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量，计算位于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面的反射参数，其中，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路。
接着，在步骤S1702中，基于第一通信设备在智能反射面相对于第一通信设备的出发角方向的第三导向矢量，计算第一通信设备的预编码向量。
作为示例，在步骤S1701和S1702的处理中所涉及的第一至第三导向矢量中的每一个所涉及的出发角或到达角各自包括水平方向上和垂直方向上的出发角或到达角。
作为示例，在步骤S1701中计算出的反射参数可以包括智能反射面的各个反射单元对信号进行幅度调节的幅度参数和/或进行相位调节的相位参数。
作为示例，在步骤S1701中，可以计算第二导向矢量与第一导向矢量的共轭的对应元素的乘积，作为智能反射面的各个反射参数。
作为示例，在步骤S1702中，可以将第三导向矢量除以第一通信设备的天线数，作为所计算的预编码向量。
可选地，尽管图17未示出，但该方法可以在步骤S1702之后附加地包括用于利用所计算的预编码向量，对第一通信设备的数据信号进行预编码的步骤。
根据本公开的实施例，执行上述方法的主体可以是根据本公开的第三实施例的电子设备1300或1400，因此前文中关于电子设备1300或1400的实施例的各种方面均适用于此。
<6.第四实施例的配置示例>
[6.0时延差的产生]
首先返回参照图3。如此前在第二实施例中参照图3所描述的，当发送侧的BS要发送给接收侧的UE的符号为x，BS采用的预编码矩阵为W时，UE接收到的符号为y＝y d+y r+z，其中，y d是通过直接链路(BS与UE之间的直接链路)接收的部分，y r是通过反射链路(BS经由IRS到达UE的链路)接收的部分，z是接收端的UE的加性噪声。并且，如此前所描述的那样，UE接收到的符号为y可以基于等式(16)和(17)而进一步表示为复制如下的等式(18)的形式：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000190
在实际应用中，上述等式(18)成立基于一个默认假设，即，直接链路和反射链路的传播时延是几乎相同的，因而两条链路的信号对于接收侧的通信设备如UE而言在时间上是对齐的。
然而，在实际系统中，可能存在直接链路和反射链路两者时延差较大的情况，此时两条链路的信号无法在接收侧的通信设备处对齐，这可能引入严重的链路间干扰，影响系统性能。
更具体地，在图3的示例中，如果UE和IRS之间的距离为d IU，IRS和BS之间的距离为d TI，UE和BS之间的距离为d TU，则反射链路与直接链路之间的距离差Δd＝d TI+d IU-d TU。假设直接链路和反射链路之间的时延差为Δδ，则距离差Δd与时延差Δδ之间存在下述对应关系：
Δd＝Δδ×3×10 8m/s    (39)
当直接链路和反射链路之间的距离差Δd或者时延差Δδ过大时，可能会导致无法容忍的链路干扰。
这里，不失一般性，作为示例假设收发端采用正交频分多址(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access，OFDMA)方案，其子载波间隔(Sub-Carrier Spacing，SCS)为15kHz，循环前缀(Cyclic Prefix，CP)长度为6.67％。在这种情况下，循环前缀能够容忍的不同链路之间的时延差阈值Δδ th以及所对应电磁波的传播距离阈值d th可以计算如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000191
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000192
这一结果意味着，当直接链路与反射链路之间的时延差Δδ>Δδ th或距离差Δd>d th时，时延差无法被前缀所容忍，等式(18)式中的信号模型无法成立。
作为示例，考虑下述情形：在图3所示的示例中，发送侧的BS经由直接链路(DTL)和反射链路(RTL)首先在时间t0发送了符号x 1，并在 时延差Δδ之后、即时间t0+Δδ发送了符号x 2。对于接收侧的UE而言，如果在第一时间t1接收到经由直接链路发送的符号x 1(DTL)，则要在第二时间t2＝t1+Δδ才接收到经由反射链路发送的符号x 1(RTL)(注意，为便于描述，这里省略了预编码矩阵等相关内容或处理)。此外，由于BS在符号x 1的发送时间t0经过时延差Δδ之后发送了符号x 2，因此接收侧的UE在接收到经由直接链路发送的符号x 1(DTL)的时间即第一时间t1之后再经过时延差Δδ时、即在第二时间t2＝t1+Δδ还接收到经由直接链路发送的符号x 2(DTL)。
在这种情况下，对于接收侧的UE而言，在第二时间t2接收到的信号实际是时间t0处发送并经由反射链路传输的符号x 1(RTL)与时间t0+Δδ处发送并经由直接链路传输的符号x 2(DTL)的叠加。当所接收到的上述两个符号x 1(RTL)和x 2(DTL)之间的时间差即两个链路的时延差Δδ大于例如等式(40)表示的时延差阈值Δδ th时，该时间差无法被循环前缀所容忍，等式(18)式中的信号模型无法成立。
因此，期望能够例如在直接链路与反射链路之间的时延差过大的情况下，适当地确定该时延差，以利于进行后续的处理，例如但不限于接收侧的通信设备的信号检测等。
鉴于上述问题，发明人提出了本公开的第四实施例，其能够适当地估计直接链路与反射链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
[6.1配置示例]
图18是示出根据本公开的第四实施例的电子设备的配置示例的框图。
如图18所示，电子设备180可以包括控制单元180-1和收发单元180-2。
这里，电子设备180的各个单元都可以包括在处理电路中。需要说明的是，电子设备180既可以包括一个处理电路，也可以包括多个处理电路。进一步，处理电路可以包括各种分立的功能单元以执行各种不同的功能和/或操作。需要说明的是，这些功能单元可以是物理实体或逻辑实体，并且不同称谓的单元可能由同一个物理实体实现。
作为示例，图18所示的电子设备180可以应用于诸如此前参照图3描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统。以下，将继续结合图3的示例描述电子设备180及其功能单元所实现的处理。
根据本公开的实施例，在电子设备180的控制单元180-1的控制下，收发单元180-2可以经由从另一通信设备到该电子设备的第一链路(直接 链路)以及从所述另一通信设备经由智能反射面到该电子设备的第二链路(反射链路)，接收所述另一通信设备发送的预定参考信号。
此外，电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
这里，电子设备180可以是诸如图3所示的系统中的接收侧的设备。由于图3所示的系统仅例示了下行传输的场景，为了便于后续描述，这里引入作为图3的变形的图19。图19是用于说明智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统中的信道的示意图，其与图3的区别在于：一方面，作为网络侧设备的示例以TRP取代了基站BS，另一方面，区分了上行和下行传输的场景。即，在图19中，通过对图3中的各个信道添加上标“DL”或“UL”，表示下行场景下的各个信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000193
或上行场景下的各个信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000194
此外，在下文中，为了便于描述，可以将与信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000195
或
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000196
对应的第一链路或直接链路简称为DTL，可以将与信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000197
反射矩阵Λ、信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000198
对应的第二链路或反射链路
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000199
或者与信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000200
反射矩阵Λ、信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000201
对应的第二链路或反射链路
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000202
简称为RTL。注意，尽管在图19中将网络侧的通信设备示出为TRP，但其也可以是任意的网络侧设备例如基站等。
在本实施例中，电子设备180是接收预定参考信号并估计时延差的设备，即，可以是图19的(A)中的UE或者图19的(B)中的TRP。与电子设备180通信的另一通信设备可以是图19的(A)中的TRP或者图19的(B)中的UE。
在一个示例中，优选地，诸如图19的(A)中的UE或者图19的(B)中的TRP的电子设备180所接收的预定参考信号可以在第一链路或直接链路DTL的信道的零空间内。
例如，取决于在下行还是上行场景下发送预定参考信号S DRS，预定参考信号S DRS可以满足下述等式之一：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000203
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000204
以此方式，当另一通信设备(例如图19的(A)中的TRP或者图19的(B)中的UE)同时经由直接链路DTL和反射链路RTL发送了预定参考信号S DRS时，DTL将会在空间上屏蔽掉S DRS，电子设备180实际上将仅接收到经由RTL传送的预定参考信号S DRS。
这里，以图19的(A)的下行场景下发送预定参考信号为例，简单描述电子设备180接收到的参考信号。在本示例中，当作为另一通信设备的TRP发送满足上述等式(41-1)的预定参考信号S DRS时，作为UE的电子设备180接收的信号可以表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000205
其中，由于S DRS满足等式(41-1)，使得经由DTL的参考信号在空间上被屏蔽掉了
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000206
因而作为UE的电子设备180只收到来自RTL的参考信号
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000207
对于图19的(B)的上行场景下，作为另一通信设备的UE发送预定参考信号的情况，当预定参考信号S DRS满足等式(41-2)时，上述描述将类似地适用。即，此时经由DTL的参考信号在空间上被屏蔽掉了
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000208
作为TRP的电子设备180只收到来自RTL的参考信号
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000209
这里不再赘述。
对于诸如上述的、在DTL的信道的零空间内的预定参考信号S DRS，由于电子设备180实际上仅接收到经由RTL传送的参考信号，因此，电子设备180可以例如通过控制单元180-1的适当处理直接测量经由RTL接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间，并将该第二接收时间与所估计的期望经由DTL接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间进行比较，以估计两条链路的时延差。
接下来，将继续结合图19的(A)和(B)的示例，描述不同场景下(即电子设备180作为图19的(A)中的UE或图19的(B)中的TRP接收参考信号的情况)，电子设备180的各个控制单元所进行的估计时延差等示例处理、以及基于所估计的时延差进行的可选后续处理。
[6.2第一示例]
在第一示例中，电子设备180例如首先实现为图19的(A)中的UE，即，接收作为另一通信设备的TRP发送的、满足上述等式(41-1)的下行预定参考信号S DRS。
(估计时延差的示例处理)
在本示例中，作为UE的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以被配置为：根据从另一通信设备获得的预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息，确定预定参考信号的发送时间；并且基于所确定的预定参考信号的发送时间以及从该另一通信设备获得的定时提前信息，估计期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间。
这里，预定参考信号可以是周期性、半周期性或非周期性参考信号，其具体形式不受限制，只要其符号满足等式(41-1)的要求即可。对于周期性的预定参考信号，作为UE的电子设备180例如可以预先经由其收发单元180-2从作为TRP的另一通信设备获取该参考信号的配置信息(参考信号的配置信息例如指示发送该参考信号的时频资源等)，并且控制单元180-1可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。对于半周期性或非周期性的预定参考信号，除了配置信息之外，还可以获取参考信号的调度信息，并且控制单元180-1可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。
此外，作为UE的电子设备180例如可以在随机接入过程中，从作为TRP的另一通信设备获得定时提前信息。例如，控制单元180-1可以基于TRP发送的定时提前命令(Timing Advance Command,TAC)获取定时提前信息，该定时提前信息指示网络侧为UE配置的定时提前值。
定时提前机制是为了确保在上行传输的场景下，上行时隙边界在网络侧设备例如基站或TRP处(近似)对齐而引入的机制。网络侧设备例如基站或TRP通过控制每个终端合适的定时提前值(偏移量)而控制接收各个终端的信号定时。定时提前值一般被设置为终端与网络侧设备(例如基站或TRP)之间的传播时延的两倍。换言之，为终端设置的定时提前值体现了终端与网络侧设备之间的传播时延。因此，在一个示例中，作为UE的电子设备180的控制单元180-1例如可以基于从作为TRP的另一通信设备预先获得的定时提前信息，确定UE与TRP之间的第一链路或直接链路DTL的传播时延。
控制单元180-1可以基于以上述方式根据预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息而确定的预定参考信号的发送时间、以及所获得的定时提前信息， 估计期望经由第一链路或直接链路DTL接收预定参考信号S DRS的第一接收时间。在一个示例中，控制单元180-1可以将上述发送时间与基于定时提前信息确定的DTL的传播时延相加，作为第一接收时间。
此外，由于预定参考信号S DRS在DTL的信道的零空间内，电子设备180实际上仅接收到经由RTL传送的参考信号，因此，控制单元180-1例如可以经由各种现有技术的方式直接测量经由RTL接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间，并计算该第二接收时间与所估计的第一接收时间之间的差，将该差值作为所估计的两条链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
接下来，将参照图20描述控制单元180-1以上述方式估计时延差的一个具体示例。图20是用于说明基于下行的预定参考信号估计时延差的示例处理的示意图。在图20的示例中，以网络侧例如TRP侧的时间为基准，示出了作为TRP的另一通信设备发送预定参考信号S DRS以及作为UE的电子设备180经由两条链路接收(或预期接收)该参考信号的时序。
如图20的上部所示，TRP在时间T0发送承载有预定参考信号S DRS的无线帧，其中，以向上的粗箭头示出了S DRS在无线帧中的位置，该位置由S DRS在无线帧中的定时偏移t DRS确定。
注意，尽管图中未示出，但作为UE的电子设备180例如可以经由从TRP获取的配置和/或调度信息，确定承载有S DRS的无线帧的发送时间T0以及S DRS在其中的定时偏移t DRS。此外，UE例如可以基于TRP发送的定时提前命令获取定时提前信息，该定时提前信息可以指示网络侧为UE配置的定时提前值L TA。
如图20的中间部分所示，作为UE的电子设备180原本预期在第一接收时间T1经由直接链路DTL接收到参考信号S DRS。控制单元180-1可以根据此前获得的承载有S DRS的无线帧的发送时间T0、定时提前值L TA、以及S DRS在无线帧中的定时偏移t DRS，将原本预期的第一接收时间T1估计如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000210
如图20的下部所示，作为UE的电子设备180在第二接收时间T2经由反射链路RTL接收到参考信号S DRS。控制单元180-1例如可以经由各种现有技术的方式直接测量经由RTL接收预定参考信号S DRS的第二接收时 间T2。
如图20中所示，第二接收时间T2满足下述关系：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000211
因此，可以基于实际测得的第二接收时间T2与所估计的第一接收时间T1之间的差，通过下述方式估计时延差Δδ：
Δδ＝T2-T1    (45)
在一个替选实现中，控制单元180-1也可以直接测量接收到的RTL链路上的参考信号S DRS所在的时间点距TRP发送无线帧的帧头的时间差Δt，并基于该时间差Δt以及上述的定时提前值L TA和定时偏移t DRS，通过下述方式估计时延差Δδ：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000212
在例如经由上述方式确定时延差后，作为UE的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以控制收发单元180-2向例如作为TRP的另一通信设备发送指示所估计的时延差的时延差信息。
在后续的通信中，作为TRP的另一通信设备例如可以基于所接收的时延差信息，对经由第一链路和第二链路接收的数据信号进行联合信号检测，以获得作为UE的电子设备180所发送的数据信号。此外，作为TRP的另一通信设备例如可以基于适用于第一链路的第一定时提前值和基于所接收的时延差信息，确定适用于第二链路的第二定时提前值，并且将向作为UE的电子设备180发送指示第一、第二定时提前值的定时提前信息。
(与基于时延差的定时提前值有关的示例处理)
在本示例中，作为UE的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：从例如作为TRP的另一通信设备接收指示两个定时提前值的定时提前信息，所述两个定时提前值包括：适用于第一链路或直接链路DTL的第一定时提前值L TA，以及基于第一定时提前值和时延差信息而确定的、适用于第二链路或反射链路RTL的第二定时提前值L′ TA。
在一个示例中，基于第一定时提前值L TA以及根据时延差信息获得的 Δδ而确定的第二定时提前值L′ TA满足下述等式：
L′ TA＝L TA+2Δδ    (47)
在设置了上述定时提前值之后，在诸如图19的(B)所示的上行场景下，作为UE的电子设备180的收发单元180-2例如可以在控制单元180-1的控制下，根据第一定时提前值L TA经由第一链路或直接链路(图19的(B)中的直接链路DTL)向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送数据信号、并根据第二定时提前值L′ TA经由第二链路或反射链路(图19的(B)中的反射链路RTL)向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送数据信号，这两个链路的数据信号将会在相同时间到达作为TRP的另一通信设备处，从而相当于消除了两路数据信号之间的时延差。换言之，可以认为直接链路DTL和反射链路RTL“对齐”了，这将有利于消除两者之间的链路干扰。
在实际应用中，当诸如图19的(B)所示的各上行信道满足稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的电子设备180的控制单元180-1和收发单元180-2可以通过适当的预编码处理以及基于两个定时提前值进行适当的发送处理，使得两个链路的数据信号在相同时间到达作为TRP的另一通信设备，并且可以由TRP通过适当的处理进行检测。
为直观起见，转而参照图22。图22是用于说明设置并应用了两个定时提前值的情况下的直接链路DTL和反射链路RTL的示意图。在图22的示例中，各上行信道满足稀疏信道条件，并且经由适当预编码处理的数据信号经由DTL和RTL传输并同时到达接收侧。该示例中，作为UE的电子设备180根据第一定时提前值L TA经由直接链路DTL向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送经由适当预编码处理的数据信号、并根据第二定时提前值L′ TA经由(使用了智能反射面IRS的)反射链路RTL向TRP发送经由适当预编码处理的数据信号，这两个链路的数据信号将在相同时间到达TRP，从而相当于消除了两路数据信号之间的时延差。
接着返回参照图19。这里，各上行信道满足稀疏信道条件是指：从作为UE的电子设备180到作为TRP的另一通信设备的第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000213
从作为UE的电子设备180到智能反射面IRS的第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000214
以及从智能反射面IRS到作为TRP的另一通信设备的第三信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000215
均为稀疏信道。
可以通过下述数学式表示稀疏信道条件：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000216
其中，rank(·)表示矩阵的秩，N r表示作为UE的电子设备180的天线数，N t表示作为TRP的另一通信设备的天线数，M表示智能反射面的反射单元的个数。上述数学式(48)要求各个信道矩阵的秩要足够小，即物理信道要足够稀疏。
在满足上述稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以在控制单元180-1的控制下，根据第一定时提前值L TA，经由第一链路DTL和第二链路RTL向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送以第一预编码矩阵P DTL预编码后的第一数据信号。此外，收发单元180-2可以在控制单元180-1的控制下，根据第二定时提前值，经由DTL和第二链路RTL向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送以第二预编码矩阵P RTL预编码后的第二数据信号。
这里，第一预编码矩阵P DTL在第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000217
的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵P RTL在第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000218
的零空间内，即，满足下述等式：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000219
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000220
此时，假设要由DTL和RTL发送的数据信号的符号分别为s DTL和s RTL，则例如控制单元180-1分别以第一、第二预编码矩阵进行预编码后的第一、第二数据信号分别为x DTL＝P DTLs DTL和x RTL＝P RTLs RTL。由于两者的定时提前值之间的差与传播时延差对应，因此，两个数据信号将会同时到达TRP侧。此时，将等式(48-1)和(48-2)带入，TRP侧的接收信号可以表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000221
对于上述接收信号，TRP侧例如可以经由适当地设置检测矩阵而进行 联合数据信号检测，从而获得UE侧发送的第一、第二数据信号。
[6.3第二示例]
在第二示例中，电子设备180例如首先实现为图19的(B)中的TRP，即，接收作为另一通信设备的UE发送的、满足上述等式(41-2)的上行预定参考信号S DRS。
(估计时延差的示例处理)
在本示例中，作为TRP的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：在控制单元180-1的控制下，基于预先确定的期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间，向作为UE的另一通信设备提供预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息。
由于上行参考信号的发送时间或接收时间是根据网络侧的配置和/或调度而确定的，因此，在本示例中，作为网络侧设备TRP的电子设备180例如可以首先确定期望经由第一链路DTL接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间，并且基于所确定的第一接收时间向作为UE的另一通信设备提供相应的配置和/或调度信息，以使得作为UE的另一通信设备根据该配置和/或调度信息发送的预定参考信号可以在第一接收时间被作为网络侧设备TRP的电子设备180接收。
这里，预定参考信号可以是周期性、半周期性或非周期性参考信号，其具体形式不受限制，只要其符号满足等式(41-2)的要求即可。对于周期性的预定参考信号，作为网络侧设备TRP的电子设备180例如可以预先经由其收发单元180-2向作为UE的另一通信设备发送该参考信号的配置信息(参考信号的配置信息例如指示发送该参考信号的时频资源等)，使得UE可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。对于半周期性或非周期性的预定参考信号，除了配置信息之外，还可以提供参考信号的调度信息，使得UE可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。
此外，作为网络侧设备TRP的电子设备180例如可以在随机接入过程中，向作为UE的另一通信设备提供定时提前信息。例如，收发单元180-2可以在控制单元180-1的控制下发送定时提前命令(Timing Advance Command,TAC)作为定时提前信息，其指示网络侧为UE配置的定时提前值。UE例如可以基于预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息以及定时提前信息，确定实际发送预定参考信号的时间，使得可以网络侧可以预期在预先确定的第一接收时间经由第一链路接收到预定参考信号。在一个示例中， UE可以将第一接收时间与基于定时提前信息确定的DTL的传播时延相减，作为发送预定参考信号的时间。
此外，由于预定参考信号S DRS在DTL的信道的零空间内，电子设备180实际上仅接收到经由RTL传送的参考信号，因此，控制单元180-1例如可以经由各种现有技术的方式直接测量经由RTL接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间，并计算该第二接收时间与预先确定的第一接收时间之间的差，将该差值作为所估计的两条链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
接下来，将参照图21描述控制单元180-1以上述方式估计时延差的一个具体示例。图21是用于说明基于上行的预定参考信号估计时延差的示例处理的示意图。在图21的示例中，以网络侧例如作为TRP的电子设备180侧的时间为基准，示出了作为UE的另一通信设备发送预定参考信号S DRS以及作为TRP的电子设备180经由两条链路接收(或预期接收)该参考信号的时序。
如图21的上部所示，作为另一设备的UE在时间T0之前的(T0-0.5L TA)处发送了承载有预定参考信号S DRS的无线帧，其中，以向上的粗箭头示出了S DRS在无线帧中的位置，该位置由例如基于配置信息等确定的S DRS在无线帧中的定时偏移t DRS确定。
注意，尽管图中未示出，但作为TRP的电子设备180例如可以向UE提供参考信号S DRS的配置和/或调度信息，该信息例如指示期望经由DTL接收承载有S DRS的无线帧的接收时间T0以及S DRS在无线帧的定时偏移t DRS，上述信息例如是电子设备180的控制单元180-1根据预先确定的期望经由DTL接收S DRS的第一接收时间T1而得出的。此外，UE例如可以基于作为TRP的电子设备180发送的定时提前命令获取定时提前信息，该定时提前信息可以指示网络侧为UE配置的定时提前值L TA。UE可以根据所获取的上述信息，在时间T0之前的(T0-0.5L TA)处发送以指定的定时偏移t DRS承载有预定参考信号S DRS的无线帧。
如图21的中间部分所示，作为TRP的电子设备180原本预期在第一接收时间T1经由直接链路DTL接收到参考信号S DRS。
T1＝T0+t DRS    (51)
此外，如图21的下部所示，作为TRP的电子设备180在第二接收时间T2经由反射链路RTL接收到参考信号S DRS。控制单元180-1例如可以经由各种现有技术的方式直接测量经由RTL接收预定参考信号S DRS的第 二接收时间T2。
如图21中所示，第二接收时间T2满足下述关系：
T2＝T0+t DRS+Δδ    (52)
因此，可以基于实际测得的第二接收时间T2与预先确定的第一接收时间T1之间的差，通过下述方式估计时延差Δδ：
Δδ＝T2-T1    (53)
在一个替选实现中，作为TRP的电子设备180的控制单元180-1也可以直接测量接收到的RTL链路上的参考信号S DRS所在的时间点距TRP期望接收到无线帧的帧头的时间差Δt，并基于该时间差Δt以及参考信号S DRS在无线帧中的定时偏移t DRS，通过下述方式估计时延差Δδ：
Δδ＝Δt-t DRS    (54)
在例如经由上述方式确定时延差后，作为TRP的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以利用所确定时延差以适当方式进行后续处理，以利于消除时延差的不利影响。
(基于时延差进行联合信道检测的示例处理)
在一个示例中，在后续的通信中，作为TRP的电子设备180例如可以基于所估计的时延差，对经由第一链路和第二链路接收的数据信号进行联合信号检测，以获得作为UE的另一通信设备所发送的数据信号。
仅作为示例，这里描述在已知时延差的情况下，电子设备180的控制单元180-1进行的联合信道检测的一个示例处理。
假设作为UE的另一通信设备在t时刻发送的信号为x 1，在t+Δδ时刻发送的信号为x 2，则在作为TRP的电子设备180侧，其收到的来自RTL的x 1信号会叠加来自DTL的x 2信号，因此实际收到的信号应为如下形式：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000222
具体的信号检测方法可以灵活设计，这里仅给出一种示例方法。如前所述，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000223
是一个N t×N r维的矩阵。记矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000224
的秩为r，即
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000225
r是一个正整数，且满足r≤min{N t,N r}。
首先，对
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000226
进行SVD分解，得到
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000227
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000228
这里，U是N t×r维的矩阵，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000229
是N t×(N t-r)维的矩阵，且满足
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000230
U HU＝I r，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000231
I表示对应维度的单位矩阵。∑′是r×r维的对角矩阵，其对角元为
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000232
的奇异值。V是N r×r维的矩阵，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000233
是N r×(N r-r)维的矩阵，且满足
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000234
V HV＝I r，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000235
接着，从
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000236
中任意挑选N r个列向量构成一个新的矩阵F，容易验证F HU＝0。
然后，对等式(55)的y UL左乘F H，得到
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000237
这里，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000238
记
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000239
为信号x 1的等效传输矩阵，则有
y 1＝T ex 1+F Hz    (58)
通过迫零(Zero Forcing，ZF)检测，可以得到对t时刻发送的信号为x 1的检测结果：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000240
根据(55)式，可得
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000241
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000242
是等效噪声。通过ZF检测，可以得到t+Δδ时刻发送的信号为x 2的检测结果：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000243
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000244
是
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000245
的伪逆矩阵。
以上描述了已知时延差的情况下，电子设备进行的联合信道检测的一个示例处理。本领域技术人员可以理解，在知晓传播时延差的情况下，可以应用各种现有方式进行联合信号检测，而不限于以上作为示例描述的情况。
此外，在进行联合信道检测时，需要知晓各个信道的信道矩阵，这些信道矩阵可以通过实际测量获得，也可以利用此前第一实施例中的“确定单元恢复完全信道的补充示例”中描述的方式、即基于整合子信道而恢复完全信道的方式获得，这里不再赘述。
(与基于时延差的定时提前值有关的示例处理)
在本示例中，作为TRP的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以被配置为：基于适用于第一链路或直接链路DTL的第一定时提前值L TA和所估计的时延差，确定适用于第二链路或反射链路RTL的第二定时提前值L′ TA。此外，电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：向作为UE的另一通信设备发送指示第一定时提前值和第二定时提前值的定时提前信息。
在一个示例中，控制单元180基于第一定时提前值L TA以及根据时延差信息获得的Δδ而确定的第二定时提前值L′ TA满足复制如下的等式(47)：
L′ TA＝L TA+2Δδ    (47)
在设置了上述定时提前值之后，在诸如图19的(B)所示的上行场景下，作为UE的另一通信设备例如可以按照在以上的6.2第一示例描述的方式，根据第一定时提前值L TA经由直接链路DTL向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送数据信号、并根据第二定时提前值L′ TA经由反射链路RTL向TRP发送数据信号。
在实际应用中，当诸如图19的(B)所示的各上行信道满足此前描述的稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的另一通信设备可以通过适当的预编码处理以及基于两个定时提前值进行适当的发送处理，使得两个链路的数据信号在相同时间到达作为TRP的电子设备180(例如与此前参照图22描述的情况类似)，并且可以由作为TRP的电子设备180通过适当的处理进行检测。
这里，各上行信道满足稀疏信道条件是指：从作为UE的另一通信设备到作为TRP的电子设备180的第一链路或直接链路DTL的第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000246
从作为UE的另一通信设备到智能反射面IRS的第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000247
以及从智能反射面IRS到作为TRP的电子设备180的第三信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000248
均为稀疏信道。作为示例，这些稀疏信道满足此前参照数学式(48)描述的条件。
在满足上述稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的另一通信设备可以根据第一定时提前值L TA，经由第一链路DTL和第二链路RTL向作为TRP的电子设备发送以第一预编码矩阵P DTL预编码后的第一数据信号。此外，作为UE的另一通信设备可以根据第二定时提前值，经由第一链路DTL和第二链路RTL向作为TRP的电子设备发送以第二预编码矩阵P RTL预编码后的第二数据信号。
这里，第一预编码矩阵P DTL在第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000249
的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵P RTL在第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000250
的零空间内，即，满足此前描述的等式(49-1)、(49-2)。
此时，假设要由DTL和RTL发送的数据信号(符号)分别为s DTL和s RTL，则例如作为UE的另一通信设备分别以第一、第二预编码矩阵进行预编码后的第一、第二数据信号分别为x DTL＝P DTLs DTL和x RTL＝P RTLs RTL。由于两者的定时提前值之间的差与传播时延差对应，因此，两个数据信号将会同时到达TRP侧。此时，TRP侧的接收信号即联合信号数据可以由复制如下的数学式(50)表示：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000251
对于上述接收信号，作为TRP的电子设备180例如可以经由适当地设置检测矩阵而进行联合数据信号检测，从而获得UE侧发送的第一、第二数据信号。
在一个示例中，对于例如具有上述等式(50)形式的接收信号即联合信号数据，作为TRP的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以被配置为：利用第一信号检测矩阵W DTL，从所接收的联合数据信号中y检测出第一数据信号，并且利用第二信号检测矩阵W PTL，从所接收的联合数据信号y中检测出第二数据信号。
这里，第一信号检测矩阵W DTL被设计为使得第三信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000252
在第一信号检测矩阵W DTL的零空间内，第二信号检测矩阵W PTL被设计为使得第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000253
在第二信号检测矩阵W PTL的零空间内，即满足下述等式：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000254
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000255
基于等式(62-1)以及数学式(50)，可以发现，利用第一信号检测矩阵W DTL，可以从所接收的联合数据信号y中检测出与第一数据信号的符号s DTL对应的部分y DTL，具体如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000256
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000257
对于上述部分y DTL，例如可以通过迫零(Zero Forcing，ZF)检测，通过对其左乘
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000258
而得到对第一数据信号的符号s DTL的检测结果。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000259
类似地，基于等式(62-2)以及数学式(50)，可以发现，利用第二信号检测矩阵W RTL，可以从所接收的联合数据信号y中检测出与第二数据信号的符号s RTL对应的部分y RTL，具体如下：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000260
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000261
对于上述部分y RTL，例如可以通过迫零(Zero Forcing，ZF)检测，通过对其左乘
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000262
而得到对第二数据信号的符号s RTL的检测结果。
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000263
由此，作为TRP的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以分别检测出作为UE的另一通信设备发送的第一数据信号和第二数据信号。
(关于链路使用的变形例)
在以上描述中，默认在诸如图3所示的系统中，始终同时使用第一链路或直接链路DTL以及第二链路或反射链路RTL。在实际应用中，无论是上行场景还是下行场景、无论是接收端还是发送端的通信设备(例如6.2第一示例以及6.3第二示例中的电子设备)都可以基于信道条件(例 如信道容量、信道质量等)，确定使用两条链路之一或两者。
因此，在本变形例中，电子设备的控制单元例如可以获得指示第一链路的信道容量或经由第一链路接收的接收信号的信号质量的信道信息，并基于所获得的信道信息以及与信道容量或信号质量相关的预定规则，确定使用第一链路和第二链路之一或两者。
举例而言，上述预定规则可以包括：当信道容量或信号质量大于第一阈值时，仅使用第一链路；当信道容量或信号质量在第一阈值与小于第一阈值的第二阈值之间时，同时使用第一链路和第二链路；当信道容量或信号质量小于第二阈值时，仅使用第二链路。
可以基于各种现有方式获得指示信道容量或信号质量的上述信道信息，这里不再赘述。
此外，针对以上描述的稀疏信道的情况下所进行的接收信号的检测进行了仿真。在仿真中，作为TRP的接收侧的电子设备采用4×4均匀平面天线阵列，作为UE的发送侧的另一通信设备采用2×2均匀平面天线阵列，智能反射面IRS为8×8均匀平面阵列，所有阵列的阵元间距均为半波长，仿真采用莱斯信道模型，莱斯因子为10dB。预先设置了诸如图19中的(B)所示的各个信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000264
以及智能反射面IRS的反射矩阵Λ，并且将反射矩阵Λ设置为使得最大化RTL的链路增益
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000265
并且设置UE和IRS之间的距离为d IU＝1.5km，IRS和TRP之间的距离为d TI＝5km，UE和TRP之间的距离为d TU＝5km。反射链路与直接链路之间的距离差Δd＝d TI+d IU-d TU＝1.5km。即，Δd大于此前参照等式(40)描述的循环前缀能够容忍的不同链路之间的时延差阈值Δδ th。
仿真结果如图23所示，图23是用于说明以不同方式使用直接链路DTL和反射链路RTL的情况下信道的归一化容量的仿真示意图。图23的横轴示出了发射功率，纵轴示出了归一化容量，并且分别示出了仅使用DTL的情况、在没有针对时延差进行任何处理(即DTL和RTL未“对齐”)时使用DTL和RTL两者的情况、以及采用了针对时延差设置的上述第二定时提前值并进行相应的处理(即DTL和RTL“对齐”)时使用DTL和RTL的情况。
从图23可以看到，在本示例中，如果不针对时延差进行任何处理即DTL和RTL未“对齐”，引入IRS并同时使用DTL和RTL反而会引起系统性能下降。相反，在采用了针对时延差设置的上述第二定时提前值并进行相应的处理之后，由于消除了链路间干扰(Cross Link Interference，CLI)，系统性能能够获得提升。
<7.第五实施例的配置示例>
[7.1配置示例]
根据本公开的第五实施例的电子设备的配置可以与第四实施例类似。即，根据第五实施例的电子设备180可以同样包括控制单元180-1和收发单元180-2，并且同样可以应用于此前参照图3和图19描述的系统。
第五实施例的电子设备与接收预定参考信号的第四实施例的电子设备的区别在于，第五实施例的电子设备是发送预定参考信号的通信设备，例如可以作为图19的(A)中的TRP或者图19的(B)中的UE来发送预定参考信号。与第五实施例的电子设备通信的另一通信设备可以是第四实施例的、接收预定参考信号的电子设备，即图19的(A)中的UE或者图19的(B)中的TRP。由于此前在对于第四实施例的描述中实际上已经描述了发送预定参考信号的通信设备所进行的处理，在第五实施例中将不再重复已经详述的细节，仅进行概述和必要的补充描述。
根据第五实施例，在本实施例的电子设备180的控制单元180-1的控制下，收发单元180-2可以经由从该电子设备到另一通信设备的第一链路(直接链路)以及从该电子设备经由智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第二链路(反射链路)，向所述另一通信设备发送预定参考信号，以供所述另一通信设备基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。如前所述，这里的另一通信设备可以是此前描述的根据第四实施例描述的电子设备。
在一个示例中，优选地，诸如图19的(A)中的TRP或者图19的(B)中的UE的本实施例的电子设备180所发送的预定参考信号可以在第一链路或直接链路DTL的信道的零空间内。
例如，取决于在下行还是上行场景下发送预定参考信号S DRS，预定参考信号S DRS可以满足复制如下的等式之一：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000266
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000267
以此方式，当本实施例的电子设备同时经由直接链路DTL和反射链路RTL发送了预定参考信号S DRS时，DTL将会在空间上屏蔽掉S DRS，接收侧的另一通信设备实际上将仅接收到经由RTL传送的预定参考信号S DRS。
本实施例的电子设备的控制单元例如可以被配置为通过对第一链路的信道进行奇异值分解，确定在该信道的零空间内的预定参考信号。
以图19的(A)中发送下行参考信号的场景为例，本实施例的电子设备的控制单元可以按照此前在第四实施例的6.3第二示例中描述的方式，对第一链路的
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000268
进行SVD分解，得到复制如下的等式(56)的分解结果：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000269
利用上述分解获得的向量
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000270
控制单元例如可以获得下述参考信号S DRS：
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000271
其中，x为任意向量，γ是归一化因子，用来保证功率约束
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000272
(发射功率)成立。以此方式确定的参考信号S DRS在第一链路的信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000273
的零空间内。
接下来，将继续结合图19的(A)和(B)的示例，概述不同场景下(即电子设备180作为图19的(A)中的TRP或图19的(B)中的UE发送参考信号时)，电子设备180的各个单元所进行的示例处理。
[7.2第一示例]
在第一示例中，电子设备180例如首先实现为图19的(A)中的TRP，即，向作为另一通信设备的UE发送满足上述等式(41-1)的下行预定参考信号S DRS；作为另一通信设备的UE例如可以是此前在第四实施例的第 一示例中描述的电子设备。
在本示例中，作为TRP的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：在控制单元180-1的控制下，向作为UE的另一通信设备的提供预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息，以指示预定参考信号的发送时间。
这里，预定参考信号可以是周期性、半周期性或非周期性参考信号，其具体形式不受限制，只要其符号满足等式(41-1)的要求即可。对于周期性的预定参考信号，作为TRP的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以向作为另一通信设备的UE提供该参考信号的配置信息(参考信号的配置信息例如指示发送该参考信号的时频资源等)，并且UE可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。对于半周期性或非周期性的预定参考信号，除了配置信息之外，还可以提供参考信号的调度信息，并且UE可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。
此外，作为网络侧设备TRP的电子设备180例如可以在随机接入过程中，向作为UE的另一通信设备提供定时提前信息。例如，可以向UE发送定时提前命令(Timing Advance Command,TAC)作为定时提前信息，该定时提前信息指示网络侧为UE配置的定时提前值。
UE可以基于根据预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息而确定的预定参考信号的发送时间、以及所获得的定时提前信息，估计期望经由第一链路或直接链路DTL接收预定参考信号S DRS的第一接收时间。此外，UE可以经由各种现有技术的方式直接测量经由RTL接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间，并计算该第二接收时间与所估计的第一接收时间之间的差，将该差值作为所估计的两条链路的传播时延之间的时延差。UE可以向例如作为TRP的本实施例的电子设备发送指示所估计的时延差的时延差信息。
相应地，本实施例的电子设备的收发单元可以从作为UE的另一通信设备接收指示所估计的时延差的时延差信息。
在一个示例中，在后续的通信中，作为TRP的本实施例的电子设备的控制单元180-1等例如可以基于所接收的时延差信息，对经由第一链路和第二链路接收的数据信号进行联合信号检测，以获得作为UE的另一通信设备所发送的数据信号。联合信号检测细节例如可以参照以上在第四实施例的第二示例中描述的部分(“基于时延差进行联合信道检测的示例处理”)，这里不再重复。
此外，在后续的通信中，在另一个示例中，作为TRP的本实施例的电子设备的控制单元180-1可以被配置为：基于适用于第一链路或直接链路DTL的第一定时提前值L TA和所接收的时延差信息，确定适用于第二链路或反射链路RTL的第二定时提前值L′ TA。此外，电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：向作为UE的另一通信设备发送指示第一定时提前值和第二定时提前值的定时提前信息。确定定时提前值的细节与第四实施例类似，这里不再赘述。
在实际应用中，当诸如图19的(B)所示的各上行信道满足此前描述的稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的另一通信设备可以通过适当的预编码处理以及基于两个定时提前值进行适当的发送处理，使得两个链路的数据信号在相同时间到达作为TRP的电子设备180，并且可以由作为TRP的电子设备180通过适当的处理进行检测。
这里，各上行信道满足稀疏信道条件是指：从作为UE的另一通信设备到作为TRP的电子设备180的第一链路或直接链路DTL的第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000274
从作为UE的另一通信设备到智能反射面IRS的第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000275
以及从智能反射面IRS到作为TRP的电子设备180的第三信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000276
均为稀疏信道。作为示例，这些稀疏信道满足此前参照数学式(48)描述的条件。
在满足上述稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的另一通信设备可以根据第一定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向作为TRP的电子设备发送以第一预编码矩阵P DTL预编码后的第一数据信号。此外，作为UE的另一通信设备可以根据第二定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向作为TRP的电子设备发送以第二预编码矩阵P RTL预编码后的第二数据信号。这里，第一预编码矩阵P DTL在第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000277
的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵P RTL在第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000278
的零空间内，即，满足此前描述的等式(49-1)、(49-2)。
此时，作为TRP的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：在控制单元180-1的控制下，经由第一链路和第二链路，从作为UE的另一通信设备接收联合数据信号，该联合数据信号包括根据第一定时提前值发送的、以上述第一预编码矩阵P DTL预编码后的第一数据信号以及根据第二定时提前值发送的、以上述第二预编码矩阵P RTL预编码后的第二数据信号。
此外，作为TRP的电子设备180的控制单元180-1可以被配置为：利用第一信号检测矩阵W DTL，从所接收的联合数据信号中检测出第一数据 信号，并且利用第二信号检测矩阵W PTL，从所接收的联合数据信号中检测出第二数据信号。这里，第一信号检测矩阵W DTL被设计为使得第三信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000279
在第一信号检测矩阵W DTL的零空间内，第二信号检测矩阵W PTL被设计为使得第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000280
在第二信号检测矩阵W PTL的零空间内，即，满足此前描述的等式(62-1)、(62-2)。进行检测的细节与第四实施例类似，这里不再赘述。
[7.3第二示例]
在第二示例中，电子设备180例如首先实现为图19的(B)中的UE，即，向作为另一通信设备的TRP发送满足上述等式(41-2)的上行预定参考信号S DRS；作为另一通信设备的TRP例如可以是此前在第四实施例的第二示例中描述的电子设备。
在本示例中，作为UE的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以被配置为：在控制单元180-1的控制下，从作为另一通信设备的TRP获得基于期望的第一接收时间而预先确定的预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息。此外，控制单元180-2可以被配置为基于所获得的配置和/或调度信息以及从作为另一通信设备的TRP获得的定时提前信息，确定预定参考信号的发送时间。
这里，预定参考信号可以是周期性、半周期性或非周期性参考信号，其具体形式不受限制，只要其符号满足等式(41-2)的要求即可。对于周期性的预定参考信号，作为UE的电子设备180的收发单元180-2可以从作为另一通信设备的TRP获取该参考信号的配置信息(参考信号的配置信息例如指示发送该参考信号的时频资源等)，并且控制单元可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。对于半周期性或非周期性的预定参考信号，除了配置信息之外，还可以获取参考信号的调度信息，并且控制单元可以据此确定该参考信号的发送时间。
此外，作为UE的电子设备180例如可以在随机接入过程中，从作为TRP的另一通信设备获取定时提前信息。例如，可以从TRP接收发送定时提前命令(Timing Advance Command,TAC)作为定时提前信息，该定时提前信息指示网络侧为UE配置的定时提前值。
作为UE的电子设备180的控制单元例如可以基于预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息以及定时提前信息，确定实际要发送预定参考信号的时间，使得可以网络侧可以预期在预先确定的第一接收时间经由第一链路接 收到预定参考信号。在一个示例中，控制单元可以将第一接收时间与基于定时提前信息确定的直接链路的传播时延相减，作为发送预定参考信号的时间。确定发送时间的细节与第四实施例类似，这里不再赘述。
作为TRP的接收侧的另一通信设备可以基于预先确定的第一接收时间以及直接测量的经由反射链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间，计算两者之间的差，将该差值作为所估计的时延差。可选地，作为TRP的接收侧的另一通信设备还可以基于适用于第一链路的第一定时提前值和所估计的时延差，确定适用于第二链路的第二定时提前值，并且向作为UE的本实施例的电子设备发送指示第一定时提前值和第二定时提前值的定时提前信息。
相应地，作为UE的本实施例的电子设备的收发单元可以从作为TRP的另一通信设备接收指示两个定时提前值的定时提前信息。
在实际应用中，当诸如图19的(B)所示的各上行信道满足此前描述的稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的本实施例的电子设备可以通过适当的预编码处理以及基于两个定时提前值进行适当的发送处理，使得两个链路的数据信号在相同时间到达作为TRP的另一通信设备，并且可以由作为TRP的另一通信设备通过适当的处理进行检测。
这里，各上行信道满足稀疏信道条件是指：从作为UE的电子设备180到作为TRP的另一通信设备的第一链路或直接链路DTL的第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000281
从作为UE的电子设备180到智能反射面IRS的第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000282
以及从智能反射面IRS到作为TRP的另一通信设备的第三信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000283
均为稀疏信道。作为示例，这些稀疏信道满足此前参照数学式(48)描述的条件。
在满足上述稀疏信道条件时，作为UE的电子设备180的收发单元可以被配置为：在控制单元的控制下，根据第一定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送以第一预编码矩阵P DTL预编码后的第一数据信号；根据第二定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向作为TRP的另一通信设备发送以第二预编码矩阵P RTL预编码后的第二数据信号。这里，第一预编码矩阵P DTL在第二信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000284
的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵P RTL在第一信道
Figure PCTCN2021119298-appb-000285
的零空间内，即，满足此前描述的等式(49-1)、(49-2)。
<8.第四至第五实施例的方法实施例>
[8.1第四实施例的方法实施例]
接下来将描述根据本公开第四实施例的无线通信方法。
图24是示出根据本公开的第四实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图。
图24所示的方法例如可以应用于诸如此前参照图3和图19描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，并且可以由此前描述的第四实施例中的电子设备实现。由于此前在对于第四实施例的描述中实际上已经描述了电子设备所实现的无线通信方法，这里将不重复已经详述的细节，而仅进行概述，但前文中关于第四实施例的电子设备的各种方面均适用于此。
如图24所示，在步骤S2401中，经由从另一通信设备到所述电子设备的第一链路以及从所述另一通信设备经由智能反射面到所述电子设备的第二链路，接收所述另一通信设备发送的预定参考信号。
接下来，在步骤S2402中，基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
[8.2第五实施例的方法实施例]
接下来将描述根据本公开第五实施例的无线通信方法。
图25是示出根据本公开的第五实施例的无线通信方法的过程示例的流程图。
图25所示的方法例如可以应用于诸如此前参照图3和图19描述的智能反射面辅助的无线通信系统，并且可以由此前描述的第五实施例中的电子设备实现。由于此前在对于第五实施例的描述中实际上已经描述了电子设备所实现的无线通信方法，这里将不重复已经详述的细节，而仅进行概述，但前文中关于第五实施例的电子设备的各种方面均适用于此。
如图25所示，在步骤S2501中，经由从电子设备到另一通信设备的第一链路以及从所述电子设备经由智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第二链路，向所述另一通信设备发送预定参考信号，以供所述另一通信设备基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
<9.应用示例>
本公开内容的技术能够应用于各种产品。
例如，电子设备400、600、700、1000、1100、1300、1400、180各自都可以被实现为任何类型的基站设备，诸如宏eNB和小eNB，还可以被实现为任何类型的gNB(5G系统中的基站)。小eNB可以为覆盖比宏小区小的小区的eNB，诸如微微eNB、微eNB和家庭(毫微微)eNB。代替地，基站可以被实现为任何其他类型的基站，诸如NodeB和基站收发台(BTS)。基站可以包括：被配置为控制无线通信的主体(也称为基站设备)；以及设置在与主体不同的地方的一个或多个远程无线头端(RRH)。
此外，电子设备400、600、700、1000、1100、1300、1400、180各自都还可以被实现为任何类型的TRP。该TRP可以具备发送和接收功能，例如可以从用户设备和基站设备接收信息，也可以向用户设备和基站设备发送信息。在典型的示例中，TRP可以为用户设备提供服务，并且受基站设备的控制。进一步，TRP可以具备与的基站设备类似的结构，也可以仅具备基站设备中与发送和接收信息相关的结构。
另外，电子设备400、600、700、1000、1100、1300、1400、180各自都还可以为各种用户设备，其可以被实现为移动终端(诸如智能电话、平板个人计算机(PC)、笔记本式PC、便携式游戏终端、便携式/加密狗型移动路由器和数字摄像装置)或者车载终端(诸如汽车导航设备)。用户设备还可以被实现为执行机器对机器(M2M)通信的终端(也称为机器类型通信(MTC)终端)。此外，用户设备可以为安装在上述用户设备中的每个用户设备上的无线通信模块(诸如包括单个晶片的集成电路模块)。
[关于基站的应用示例]
(第一应用示例)
图26是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第一示例的框图。eNB 1800包括一个或多个天线1810以及基站设备1820。基站设备1820和每个天线1810可以经由RF线缆彼此连接。
天线1810中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在多输入多输出(MIMO)天线中的多个天线元件)，并且用于基站设备1820发 送和接收无线信号。如图26所示，eNB 1800可以包括多个天线1810。例如，多个天线1810可以与eNB 1800使用的多个频带兼容。虽然图26示出其中eNB 1800包括多个天线1810的示例，但是eNB 1800也可以包括单个天线1810。
基站设备1820包括控制器1821、存储器1822、网络接口1823以及无线通信接口1825。
控制器1821可以为例如CPU或DSP，并且操作基站设备1820的较高层的各种功能。例如，控制器1821根据由无线通信接口1825处理的信号中的数据来生成数据分组，并经由网络接口1823来传递所生成的分组。控制器1821可以对来自多个基带处理器的数据进行捆绑以生成捆绑分组，并传递所生成的捆绑分组。控制器1821可以具有执行如下控制的逻辑功能：该控制诸如为无线资源控制、无线承载控制、移动性管理、接纳控制和调度。该控制可以结合附近的eNB或核心网节点来执行。存储器1822包括RAM和ROM，并且存储由控制器1821执行的程序和各种类型的控制数据(诸如终端列表、传输功率数据以及调度数据)。
网络接口1823为用于将基站设备1820连接至核心网1824的通信接口。控制器1821可以经由网络接口1823而与核心网节点或另外的eNB进行通信。在此情况下，eNB 1800与核心网节点或其他eNB可以通过逻辑接口(诸如S1接口和X2接口)而彼此连接。网络接口1823还可以为有线通信接口或用于无线回程线路的无线通信接口。如果网络接口1823为无线通信接口，则与由无线通信接口1825使用的频带相比，网络接口1823可以使用较高频带用于无线通信。
无线通信接口1825支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如长期演进(LTE)和LTE-先进)，并且经由天线1810来提供到位于eNB 1800的小区中的终端的无线连接。无线通信接口1825通常可以包括例如基带(BB)处理器1826和RF电路1827。BB处理器1826可以执行例如编码/解码、调制/解调以及复用/解复用，并且执行层(例如L1、介质访问控制(MAC)、无线链路控制(RLC)和分组数据汇聚协议(PDCP))的各种类型的信号处理。代替控制器1821，BB处理器1826可以具有上述逻辑功能的一部分或全部。BB处理器1826可以为存储通信控制程序的存储器，或者为包括被配置为执行程序的处理器和相关电路的模块。更新程序可以使BB处理器1826的功能改变。该模块可以为插入到基站设备1820的槽中的卡或 刀片。可替代地，该模块也可以为安装在卡或刀片上的芯片。同时，RF电路1827可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线1810来传送和接收无线信号。
如图26所示，无线通信接口1825可以包括多个BB处理器1826。例如，多个BB处理器1826可以与eNB 1800使用的多个频带兼容。如图26所示，无线通信接口1825可以包括多个RF电路1827。例如，多个RF电路1827可以与多个天线元件兼容。虽然图26示出其中无线通信接口1825包括多个BB处理器1826和多个RF电路1827的示例，但是无线通信接口1825也可以包括单个BB处理器1826或单个RF电路1827。
在图26所示的eNB 1800中，此前参照图6描述的电子设备600中的获取单元610可以通过无线通信接口1825(可选地连同天线1810)等实现。此前参照图7描述的电子设备700中的获取单元710可以通过控制器1821(可选地连同无线通信接口1825和天线1810)等实现。此前参照图4描述的电子设备400中的获取单元410可以与电子设备600中的获取单元610或电子设备700中的获取单元710类似地实现。此外，电子设备400、600、700中的确定单元420、620、720可以通过控制器1821实现。电子设备600中的发送单元630和电子设备700中的接收单元730可以通过无线通信接口1825(可选地连同天线1810)等实现。
此外，在图26所示的eNB 1800中，此前参照图10、图11描述的电子设备1000、1100中的第一计算单元1010和1110以及第二计算单元1020和1120可以利用控制器1821实现。此外，电子设备1100中的预编码1130单元例如可以通过控制器1821或通过无线通信接口1825(例如在控制器1821的控制下)实现。
另外，在图26所示的eNB 1800中，此前参照图13、图14描述的电子设备1300、1400中的反射计算单元1310和1410以及预编码计算单元1320和1420可以利用控制器1821实现。此外，电子设备1400中的预编码单元1430例如可以通过控制器1821或通过无线通信接口1825(例如在控制器1821的控制下)实现。
另外，在图26所示的eNB 1800中，此前参照图18描述的电子设备18中的控制单元180-1可以利用控制器1821实现。此外，电子设备180中的收发单元180-2例如可以通过无线通信接口1825(可选地连同天线1810)(例如在控制器1821的控制下)实现。
(第二应用示例)
图27是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第二示例的框图。eNB 1930包括一个或多个天线1940、基站设备1950和RRH 1960。RRH 1960和每个天线1940可以经由RF线缆而彼此连接。基站设备1950和RRH 1960可以经由诸如光纤线缆的高速线路而彼此连接。
天线1940中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在MIMO天线中的多个天线元件)并且用于RRH 1960发送和接收无线信号。如图27所示，eNB 1930可以包括多个天线1940。例如，多个天线1940可以与eNB 1930使用的多个频带兼容。虽然图27示出其中eNB 1930包括多个天线1940的示例，但是eNB 1930也可以包括单个天线1940。
基站设备1950包括控制器1951、存储器1952、网络接口1953、无线通信接口1955以及连接接口1957。控制器1951、存储器1952和网络接口1953与参照图26描述的控制器1821、存储器1822和网络接口1823相同。网络接口1953为用于将基站设备1950连接至核心网1954的通信接口。
无线通信接口1955支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如LTE和LTE-先进)，并且经由RRH 1960和天线1940来提供到位于与RRH 1960对应的扇区中的终端的无线通信。无线通信接口1955通常可以包括例如BB处理器1956。除了BB处理器1956经由连接接口1957连接到RRH 1960的RF电路1964之外，BB处理器1956与参照图26描述的BB处理器1826相同。如图27所示，无线通信接口1955可以包括多个BB处理器1956。例如，多个BB处理器1956可以与eNB 1930使用的多个频带兼容。虽然图27示出其中无线通信接口1955包括多个BB处理器1956的示例，但是无线通信接口1955也可以包括单个BB处理器1956。
连接接口1957为用于将基站设备1950(无线通信接口1955)连接至RRH 1960的接口。连接接口1957还可以为用于将基站设备1950(无线通信接口1955)连接至RRH 1960的上述高速线路中的通信的通信模块。
RRH 1960包括连接接口1961和无线通信接口1963。
连接接口1961为用于将RRH 1960(无线通信接口1963)连接至基站设备1950的接口。连接接口1961还可以为用于上述高速线路中的通信的通信模块。
无线通信接口1963经由天线1940来传送和接收无线信号。无线通信接口1963通常可以包括例如RF电路1964。RF电路1964可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线1940来传送和接收无线信号。如图27所示，无线通信接口1963可以包括多个RF电路1964。例如，多个RF电路1964可以支持多个天线元件。虽然图27示出其中无线通信接口1963包括多个RF电路1964的示例，但是无线通信接口1963也可以包括单个RF电路1964。
在图27所示的eNB 1930中，此前参照图6描述的电子设备600中的获取单元610可以通过无线通信接口1963(可选地连同天线1940)等实现。此前参照图7描述的电子设备700中的获取单元710可以通过控制器1951(可选地连同无线通信接口1963和天线1940)等实现。此前参照图4描述的电子设备400中的获取单元410可以与电子设备600中的获取单元610或电子设备700中的获取单元710类似地实现。此外，电子设备400、600、700中的确定单元420、620、720可以通过控制器1951实现。电子设备600中的发送单元630和电子设备700中的接收单元730可以通过无线通信接口1963(可选地连同天线1940)等实现。
此外，在图27所示的eNB 1930中，此前参照图10、图11描述的电子设备1000、1100中的第一计算单元1010和1110以及第二计算单元1020和1120可以利用控制器1951实现。此外，电子设备1100中的预编码1130单元例如可以通过控制器1951或通过无线通信接口1955或1963(例如在控制器1951的控制下)实现。
另外，在图27所示的eNB 1930中，此前参照图13、图14描述的电子设备1300、1400中的反射计算单元1310和1410以及预编码计算单元1320和1420可以利用控制器1951实现。此外，电子设备1400中的预编码单元1430例如可以通过控制器1951或通过无线通信接口1955或1963(例如在控制器1951的控制下)实现。
另外，在图27所示的eNB 1930中，此前参照图18描述的电子设备18中的控制单元180-1可以利用控制器1951实现。此外，电子设备180中的收发单元180-2例如可以通过无线通信接口1955或1963(可选地连同天线1940)(例如在控制器1951的控制下)实现。
[关于用户设备的应用示例]
(第一应用示例)
图28是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的智能电话2000的示意性配置的示例的框图。智能电话2000包括处理器2001、存储器2002、存储装置2003、外部连接接口2004、摄像装置2006、传感器2007、麦克风2008、输入装置2009、显示装置2010、扬声器2011、无线通信接口2012、一个或多个天线开关2015、一个或多个天线2016、总线2017、电池2018以及辅助控制器2019。
处理器2001可以为例如CPU或片上系统(SoC)，并且控制智能电话2000的应用层和另外层的功能。存储器2002包括RAM和ROM，并且存储数据和由处理器2001执行的程序。存储装置2003可以包括存储介质，诸如半导体存储器和硬盘。外部连接接口2004为用于将外部装置(诸如存储卡和通用串行总线(USB)装置)连接至智能电话2000的接口。
摄像装置2006包括图像传感器(诸如电荷耦合器件(CCD)和互补金属氧化物半导体(CMOS))，并且生成捕获图像。传感器2007可以包括一组传感器，诸如测量传感器、陀螺仪传感器、地磁传感器和加速度传感器。麦克风2008将输入到智能电话2000的声音转换为音频信号。输入装置2009包括例如被配置为检测显示装置2010的屏幕上的触摸的触摸传感器、小键盘、键盘、按钮或开关，并且接收从用户输入的操作或信息。显示装置2010包括屏幕(诸如液晶显示器(LCD)和有机发光二极管(OLED)显示器)，并且显示智能电话2000的输出图像。扬声器2011将从智能电话2000输出的音频信号转换为声音。
无线通信接口2012支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如LTE和LTE-先进)，并且执行无线通信。无线通信接口2012通常可以包括例如BB处理器2013和RF电路2014。BB处理器2013可以执行例如编码/解码、调制/解调以及复用/解复用，并且执行用于无线通信的各种类型的信号处理。同时，RF电路2014可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线2016来传送和接收无线信号。无线通信接口2012可以为其上集成有BB处理器2013和RF电路2014的一个芯片模块。如图28所示，无线通信接口2012可以包括多个BB处理器2013和多个RF电路2014。虽然图28示出其中无线通信接口2012包括多个BB处理器2013和多个RF电路2014的示例，但是无线通信接口2012也可以包括单个BB处理器2013或单个RF电路2014。
此外，除了蜂窝通信方案之外，无线通信接口2012可以支持另外类 型的无线通信方案，诸如短距离无线通信方案、近场通信方案和无线局域网(LAN)方案。在此情况下，无线通信接口2012可以包括针对每种无线通信方案的BB处理器2013和RF电路2014。
天线开关2015中的每一个在包括在无线通信接口2012中的多个电路(例如用于不同的无线通信方案的电路)之间切换天线916的连接目的地。
天线2016中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在MIMO天线中的多个天线元件)，并且用于无线通信接口2012传送和接收无线信号。如图28所示，智能电话2000可以包括多个天线2016。虽然图28示出其中智能电话2000包括多个天线2016的示例，但是智能电话2000也可以包括单个天线2016。
此外，智能电话2000可以包括针对每种无线通信方案的天线2016。在此情况下，天线开关2015可以从智能电话2000的配置中省略。
总线2017将处理器2001、存储器2002、存储装置2003、外部连接接口2004、摄像装置2006、传感器2007、麦克风2008、输入装置2009、显示装置2010、扬声器2011、无线通信接口2012以及辅助控制器2019彼此连接。电池2018经由馈线向图28所示的智能电话2000的各个块提供电力，馈线在图中被部分地示为虚线。辅助控制器2019例如在睡眠模式下操作智能电话2000的最小必需功能。
在图28所示的智能电话2000中，此前参照图6描述的电子设备600中的获取单元610可以通过无线通信接口2012(可选地连同天线2016)等实现。此前参照图7描述的电子设备700中的获取单元710可以通过处理器2001(可选地连同无线通信接口2012和天线2016)等实现。此前参照图4描述的电子设备400中的获取单元410可以与电子设备600中的获取单元610或电子设备700中的获取单元710类似地实现。此外，电子设备400、600、700中的确定单元420、620、720可以通过处理器2001实现。电子设备600中的发送单元630和电子设备700中的接收单元730可以通过无线通信接口2012(可选地连同天线2016)等实现。
此外，在图28所示的智能电话2000中，此前参照图10、图11描述的电子设备1000、1100中的第一计算单元1010和1110以及第二计算单元1020和1120可以利用处理器2001实现。此外，电子设备1100中的预编码1130单元例如可以通过处理器2001或通过无线通信接口2012(例如在处理器2001的控制下)实现。
另外，在图28所示的智能电话2000中，此前参照图13、图14描述的电子设备1300、1400中的反射计算单元1310和1410以及预编码计算单元1320和1420可以利用处理器2001实现。此外，电子设备1400中的预编码单元1430例如可以通过处理器2001或通过无线通信接口2012(例如在处理器2001的控制下)实现。
另外，在图28所示的智能电话2000中，此前参照图18描述的电子设备18中的控制单元180-1可以利用处理器2001实现。此外，电子设备180中的收发单元180-2例如可以通过无线通信接口2012(可选地连同天线2016)(例如在处理器2001的控制下)实现。
(第二应用示例)
图29是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的汽车导航设备2120的示意性配置的示例的框图。汽车导航设备2120包括处理器2121、存储器2122、全球定位系统(GPS)模块2124、传感器2125、数据接口2126、内容播放器2127、存储介质接口2128、输入装置2129、显示装置2130、扬声器2131、无线通信接口2133、一个或多个天线开关2136、一个或多个天线2137以及电池2138。
处理器2121可以为例如CPU或SoC，并且控制汽车导航设备2120的导航功能和另外的功能。存储器2122包括RAM和ROM，并且存储数据和由处理器2121执行的程序。
GPS模块2124使用从GPS卫星接收的GPS信号来测量汽车导航设备2120的位置(诸如纬度、经度和高度)。传感器2125可以包括一组传感器，诸如陀螺仪传感器、地磁传感器和空气压力传感器。数据接口2126经由未示出的终端而连接到例如车载网络2141，并且获取由车辆生成的数据(诸如车速数据)。
内容播放器2127再现存储在存储介质(诸如CD和DVD)中的内容，该存储介质被插入到存储介质接口2128中。输入装置2129包括例如被配置为检测显示装置2130的屏幕上的触摸的触摸传感器、按钮或开关，并且接收从用户输入的操作或信息。显示装置2130包括诸如LCD或OLED显示器的屏幕，并且显示导航功能的图像或再现的内容。扬声器2131输出导航功能的声音或再现的内容。
无线通信接口2133支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如LTE和LTE-先进)，并且执行无线通信。无线通信接口2133通常可以包括例如BB处理器2134 和RF电路2135。BB处理器2134可以执行例如编码/解码、调制/解调以及复用/解复用，并且执行用于无线通信的各种类型的信号处理。同时，RF电路2135可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线2137来传送和接收无线信号。无线通信接口2133还可以为其上集成有BB处理器2134和RF电路2135的一个芯片模块。如图29所示，无线通信接口2133可以包括多个BB处理器2134和多个RF电路2135。虽然图29示出其中无线通信接口2133包括多个BB处理器2134和多个RF电路2135的示例，但是无线通信接口2133也可以包括单个BB处理器2134或单个RF电路2135。
此外，除了蜂窝通信方案之外，无线通信接口2133可以支持另外类型的无线通信方案，诸如短距离无线通信方案、近场通信方案和无线LAN方案。在此情况下，针对每种无线通信方案，无线通信接口2133可以包括BB处理器2134和RF电路2135。
天线开关2136中的每一个在包括在无线通信接口2133中的多个电路(诸如用于不同的无线通信方案的电路)之间切换天线2137的连接目的地。
天线2137中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在MIMO天线中的多个天线元件)，并且用于无线通信接口2133传送和接收无线信号。如图29所示，汽车导航设备2120可以包括多个天线2137。虽然图29示出其中汽车导航设备2120包括多个天线2137的示例，但是汽车导航设备2120也可以包括单个天线2137。
此外，汽车导航设备2120可以包括针对每种无线通信方案的天线2137。在此情况下，天线开关2136可以从汽车导航设备2120的配置中省略。
电池2138经由馈线向图29所示的汽车导航设备2120的各个块提供电力，馈线在图中被部分地示为虚线。电池2138累积从车辆提供的电力。
在图29示出的汽车导航设备2120中，此前参照图6描述的电子设备600中的获取单元610可以通过无线通信接口2133(可选地连同天线2137)等实现。此前参照图7描述的电子设备700中的获取单元710可以通过处理器2121(可选地连同无线通信接口2133和天线2137)等实现。此前参照图4描述的电子设备400中的获取单元410可以与电子设备600中的获取单元610或电子设备700中的获取单元710类似地实现。此外，电子设 备400、600、700中的确定单元420、620、720可以通过处理器2121实现。电子设备600中的发送单元630和电子设备700中的接收单元730可以通过无线通信接口2133(可选地连同天线2137)等实现。
此外，在图29示出的汽车导航设备2120中，此前参照图10、图11描述的电子设备1000、1100中的第一计算单元1010和1110以及第二计算单元1020和1120可以利用处理器2121实现。此外，电子设备1100中的预编码1130单元例如可以通过处理器2121或通过无线通信接口2133(例如在处理器2121的控制下)实现。
另外，在图29所示的汽车导航设备2120中，此前参照图13、图14描述的电子设备1300、1400中的反射计算单元1310和1410以及预编码计算单元1320和1420可以利用处理器2121实现。此外，电子设备1400中的预编码单元1430例如可以通过处理器2121或通过无线通信接口2133(例如在处理器2121的控制下)实现。
另外，在图29所示的汽车导航设备2120中，此前参照图18描述的电子设备18中的控制单元180-1可以利用处理器2121实现。此外，电子设备180中的收发单元180-2例如可以通过无线通信接口2133(可选地连同天线2137)(例如在处理器2121的控制下)实现。
本公开内容的技术也可以被实现为包括汽车导航设备2120、车载网络2141以及车辆模块2142中的一个或多个块的车载系统(或车辆)2140。车辆模块2142生成车辆数据(诸如车速、发动机速度和故障信息)，并且将所生成的数据输出至车载网络2141。
以上参照附图描述了本公开的优选实施例，但是本公开当然不限于以上示例。本领域技术人员可在所附权利要求的范围内得到各种变更和修改，并且应理解这些变更和修改自然将落入本公开的技术范围内。
例如，附图所示的功能框图中以虚线框示出的单元均表示该功能单元在相应装置中是可选的，并且各个可选的功能单元可以以适当的方式进行组合以实现所需功能。
例如，在以上实施例中包括在一个单元中的多个功能可以由分开的装置来实现。替选地，在以上实施例中由多个单元实现的多个功能可分别由分开的装置来实现。另外，以上功能之一可由多个单元来实现。无需说，这样的配置包括在本公开的技术范围内。
在该说明书中，流程图中所描述的步骤不仅包括以所述顺序按时间序列执行的处理，而且包括并行地或单独地而不是必须按时间序列执行的处理。此外，甚至在按时间序列处理的步骤中，无需说，也可以适当地改变该顺序。
以上虽然结合附图详细描述了本公开的实施例，但是应当明白，上面所描述的实施方式只是用于说明本公开，而并不构成对本公开的限制。对于本领域的技术人员来说，可以对上述实施方式作出各种修改和变更而没有背离本公开的实质和范围。因此，本公开的范围仅由所附的权利要求及其等效含义来限定。

Claims (43)

  1. 一种电子设备，包括：
    处理电路，被配置为：
    获取经由多次信道测量获得的、关于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的等效信道的多个信道信息，在每次信道测量中，第二通信设备基于所接收的从第一通信设备发送的参考信号、以及第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面使用相应的一组反射参数反射所述参考信号而发出的反射信号而获得一个信道信息；以及
    通过对多次信道测量中使用的多组反射参数与所获取的多个信道信息进行联合处理，确定能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征所述等效信道的多个整合子信道的信道估计。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的电子设备，其中，所述等效信道包括从第一通信设备到第二通信设备的第一链路以及从第一通信设备经由智能反射面到第二通信设备的第二链路。
  3. 如权利要求1所述的电子设备，其中，所述反射信号是智能反射面的各个反射单元根据各自的反射参数对所述参考信号进行幅度和/或相位调节后发出的。
  4. 如权利要求1所述的电子设备，其中，所获取的多个信道信息包括所述等效信道的多个信道状态信息，并且所述处理电路还被配置为：基于所获取的多个信道状态信息，分别确定所述等效信道的多个信道估计。
  5. 如权利要求1所述的电子设备，其中，所获取的多个信道信息包括所述等效信道的多个信道估计。
  6. 如权利要求4或5所述的电子设备，其中，所述联合处理包括：
    将基于多组反射参数获得的多个扩展反射向量构造的训练矩阵的逆矩阵与基于多个信道估计构造的观测矩阵相乘，以确定各个整合子信道的信道矩阵，其中，通过为多组反射参数中的每组反射参数分别添加一个预定常数而获得所述多个扩展反射向量。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的电子设备，其中，智能反射面包括M个反射单元并在每次反射中使用与M个反射单元对应的一组M个反射参数，M为大于1的自然数，并且其中，所述处理电路还被配置为通过所述相乘确定共M+1个整合子信道的信道矩阵。
  8. 如权利要求7所述的电子设备，其中，所述信道测量的次数或反射参数的组数L大于或等于M+1。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：将每个整合子信道表示为N r*N t的信道矩阵，其中，N r表示第二通信设备的天线数，N t表示第一通信设备的天线数。
  10. 如权利要求7所述的电子设备，其中，每次反射中使用的M个反射参数的取值选自L阶离散傅里叶变换矩阵的矩阵元素当中除了第一行以外的M个矩阵元素。
  11. 如权利要求7所述的电子设备，其中，每次反射中使用的M个反射参数的取值选自L阶哈达玛矩阵的矩阵元素当中除了第一行以外的M个矩阵元素。
  12. 如权利要求7所述的电子设备，其中，在所确定的共M+1个整合子信道的信道矩阵当中，一个整合子信道能够表征从第一通信设备到第二通信设备的第一链路，其余M个整合子信道能够与智能反射面的反射参数一起表征从第一通信设备经由智能反射面到第二通信设备的第二链路。
  13. 如权利要求12所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：将所述一个整合子信道的信道矩阵确定为从第一通信设备到第二通信设备的第一信道的信道矩阵；
    基于所述其余M个整合子信道的信道矩阵的转置的特征向量，确定从第一通信设备到智能反射面的第二信道的信道矩阵；
    基于所述其余M个整合子信道的信道矩阵的特征向量，确定从智能反射面到第二通信设备的第三信道的信道矩阵。
  14. 如权利要求1所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：确定每次测量中所使用的智能反射面的反射参数。
  15. 如权利要求14所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：为智能反射面提供关于反射参数的控制信息。
  16. 一种电子设备，包括
    处理电路，被配置为：
    根据利用如权利要求1至15中任一项所述的电子设备获得的多个整合子信道的信道估计，计算第一预编码矩阵；以及
    基于第一预编码矩阵，计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第一通信设备的第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射参数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵相似。
  17. 如权利要求16所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：根据扩展反射向量与第二预编码矩阵的内积而生成所述等效预编码矩阵，其中，通过为智能反射面在一次反射中使用的一组反射参数添加一个预定常数而获得该扩展反射向量。
  18. 如权利要求16所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置 为：计算智能反射面的反射参数以及第二预编码矩阵，使得基于所计算的反射参数与第二预编码矩阵生成的等效预编码矩阵与第一预编码矩阵之间的F范数最小。
  19. 一种电子设备，包括：
    处理电路，被配置为：
    基于智能反射面在第一通信设备相对于智能反射面的到达角方向的第一导向矢量以及智能反射面在第二通信设备相对于智能反射面的出发角方向的第二导向矢量，计算位于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的智能反射面的反射参数，其中，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间不存在直接链路；以及
    基于第一通信设备在智能反射面相对于第一通信设备的出发角方向的第三导向矢量，计算第一通信设备的预编码向量。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的电子设备，其中，第一至第三导向矢量中的每一个所涉及的出发角或到达角各自包括水平方向上和垂直方向上的出发角或到达角。
  21. 如权利要求19所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：计算第二导向矢量与第一导向矢量的共轭的对应元素的乘积，作为智能反射面的各个反射参数。
  22. 如权利要求19所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路还被配置为：将第三导向矢量除以第一通信设备的天线数，作为所计算的预编码向量。
  23. 一种电子设备，包括：
    处理电路，被配置为：
    经由从另一通信设备到所述电子设备的第一链路以及从所述另一通 信设备经由智能反射面到所述电子设备的第二链路，接收所述另一通信设备发送的预定参考信号；以及
    基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
  24. 如权利要求23所述的电子设备，其中，预定参考信号在第一链路的信道的零空间内。
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的电子设备，其中，所述另一通信设备为网络侧设备，所述电子设备为用户侧设备，并且其中所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    根据从所述另一通信设备获得的预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息，确定预定参考信号的发送时间；以及
    基于所确定的预定参考信号的发送时间以及从所述另一通信设备获得的定时提前信息，估计第一接收时间。
  26. 如权利要求25所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    向所述另一通信设备发送指示所估计的时延差的时延差信息。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    从所述另一通信设备接收指示两个定时提前值的定时提前信息，所述两个定时提前值包括：适用于第一链路的第一定时提前值，以及基于第一定时提前值和时延差信息而确定的、适用于第二链路的第二定时提前值。
  28. 如权利要求27所述的电子设备，其中，从所述电子设备到所述另一通信设备的第一信道、从所述电子设备到智能反射面的第二信道以及 从智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第三信道均为稀疏信道，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    根据第一定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向所述另一通信设备发送以第一预编码矩阵预编码后的第一数据信号；以及
    根据第二定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向所述另一通信设备发送以第二预编码矩阵预编码后的第二数据信号，
    其中，第一预编码矩阵在第二信道的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵在第一信道的零空间内。
  29. 如权利要求23或28所述的电子设备，其中，所述另一通信设备为用户侧设备，所述电子设备为网络侧设备，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    基于预先确定的第一接收时间，向所述另一通信设备提供预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息。
  30. 如权利要求29所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：基于所估计的时延差，对经由第一链路和第二链路接收的数据信号进行联合信号检测，以获得所述另一通信设备发送的数据信号。
  31. 如权利要求29所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    基于适用于第一链路的第一定时提前值和所估计的时延差，确定适用于第二链路的第二定时提前值；以及
    向所述另一通信设备发送指示第一定时提前值和第二定时提前值的定时提前信息。
  32. 如权利要求31所述的电子设备，其中，第一链路的第一信道、第二链路中从所述另一通信设备到智能反射面的第二信道以及从智能反射面到所述电子设备的第三信道均为稀疏信道，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    经由第一链路和第二链路，从所述另一通信设备接收联合数据信号，所述联合数据信号包括根据第一定时提前值发送的、以第一预编码矩阵预编码后的第一数据信号以及根据第二定时提前值发送的、以第二预编码矩阵预编码后的第二数据信号；
    利用第一信号检测矩阵，从所接收的联合数据信号中检测出第一数据信号；以及
    利用第二信号检测矩阵，从所接收的联合数据信号中检测出第二数据信号，
    其中，第一预编码矩阵在第二信道的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵在第一信道的零空间内，第一信号检测矩阵被设计为使得第三信道在第一信号检测矩阵的零空间内，第二信号检测矩阵被设计为使得第一信道在第二信号检测矩阵的零空间内。
  33. 一种电子设备，包括：
    处理电路，被配置为：
    经由从所述电子设备到另一通信设备的第一链路以及从所述电子设备经由智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第二链路，向所述另一通信设备发送预定参考信号，以供所述另一通信设备基于期望经由第一链路接收预定参考信号的第一接收时间与实际经由第二链路接收预定参考信号的第二接收时间之间的差，估计第一链路的传播时延与第二链路的传播时延之间的时延差。
  34. 如权利要求33所述的电子设备，其中，预定参考信号在第一链路的信道的零空间内。
  35. 如权利要求34所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：通过对第一链路的信道进行奇异值分解，确定在该信道的零空间内的预定参考信号。
  36. 如权利要求33至35中任一项所述的电子设备，其中，所述电子 设备为网络侧设备，所述另一通信设备为用户侧设备，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    向所述另一通信设备提供预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息，以指示预定参考信号的发送时间。
  37. 如权利要求36所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    从所述另一通信设备接收指示所估计的时延差的时延差信息。
  38. 如权利要求37所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：基于所接收的时延差信息，对经由第一链路和第二链路接收的数据信号进行联合信号检测，以获得所述另一通信设备发送的数据信号。
  39. 如权利要求37所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    基于适用于第一链路的第一定时提前值和所接收的时延差信息，确定适用于第二链路的第二定时提前值；以及
    向所述另一通信设备发送指示第一定时提前值和第二定时提前值的定时提前信息。
  40. 如权利要求39所述的电子设备，其中，从所述另一通信设备到所述电子设备的第一信道、从所述另一通信设备到智能反射面的第二信道以及从智能反射面到所述电子设备的第三信道均为稀疏信道，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    经由第一链路和第二链路，从所述另一通信设备接收联合数据信号，所述联合数据信号包括根据第一定时提前值发送的、以第一预编码矩阵预编码后的第一数据信号以及根据第二定时提前值发送的、以第二预编码矩阵预编码后的第二数据信号；
    利用第一信号检测矩阵，从所接收的联合数据信号中检测出第一数据信号；以及
    利用第二信号检测矩阵，从所接收的联合数据信号中检测出第二数据信号，
    其中，第一预编码矩阵在第二信道的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵在第一信道的零空间内，第一信号检测矩阵被设计为使得第三信道在第一信号检测矩阵的零空间内，第二信号检测矩阵被设计为使得第一信道在第二信号检测矩阵的零空间内。
  41. 如权利要求33至35中任一项所述的电子设备，其中，所述电子设备为用户侧设备，所述另一通信设备为网络侧设备，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    从所述另一通信设备获得基于期望的第一接收时间而预先确定的预定参考信号的配置和/或调度信息，并基于所述配置和/或调度信息以及从所述另一通信设备获得的定时提前信息，确定预定参考信号的发送时间。
  42. 如权利要求41所述的电子设备，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：从所述另一通信设备接收指示两个定时提前值的定时提前信息，所述两个定时提前值包括：适用于第一链路的第一定时提前值，以及基于第一定时提前值和时延差信息而确定的、适用于第二链路的第二定时提前值。
  43. 如权利要求42所述的电子设备，其中，第一链路的第一信道、第二链路中从所述电子设备到智能反射面的第二信道以及从智能反射面到所述另一通信设备的第三信道均为稀疏信道，并且其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置为：
    根据第一定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向所述另一通信设备发送以第一预编码矩阵预编码后的第一数据信号；以及
    根据第二定时提前值，经由第一链路和第二链路向所述另一通信设备发送以第二预编码矩阵预编码后的第二数据信号，
    其中，第一预编码矩阵在第二信道的零空间内，第二预编码矩阵在第一信道的零空间内。
PCT/CN2021/119298 2020-09-21 2021-09-18 电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质 WO2022057918A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/021,175 US20230318177A1 (en) 2020-09-21 2021-09-18 Electronic device, wireless communication method and computer-readable storage medium
CN202180062718.1A CN116711158A (zh) 2020-09-21 2021-09-18 电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质
EP21868740.8A EP4207491A4 (en) 2020-09-21 2021-09-18 ELECTRONIC DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010995016.6 2020-09-21
CN202010995016.6A CN114257475A (zh) 2020-09-21 2020-09-21 电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022057918A1 true WO2022057918A1 (zh) 2022-03-24

Family

ID=80775930

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/119298 WO2022057918A1 (zh) 2020-09-21 2021-09-18 电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230318177A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4207491A4 (zh)
CN (2) CN114257475A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022057918A1 (zh)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114745038A (zh) * 2022-04-18 2022-07-12 北京航空航天大学 一种基于智能反射面双反射结构的联合波束成形设计方法
CN115865597A (zh) * 2022-11-24 2023-03-28 浙江香农通信科技有限公司 一种空间移位键控反射调制方法
WO2023207634A1 (zh) * 2022-04-27 2023-11-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 调控方法、信息处理方法、信号调节装置、设备及介质
WO2023241448A1 (zh) * 2022-06-15 2023-12-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 测量处理方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2024044990A1 (zh) * 2022-08-30 2024-03-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 基于智能超表面的预编码方法及装置

Families Citing this family (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230291460A1 (en) * 2022-01-26 2023-09-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Compensation for an intelligent reflecting surface
US20230283357A1 (en) * 2022-03-02 2023-09-07 Acer Incorporated Method of channel measurement for intelligent reflecting surface assisted wireless network and base station using the same
WO2023216165A1 (zh) * 2022-05-11 2023-11-16 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种控制智能超表面ris发射参考信号的方法及装置
US20230379867A1 (en) * 2022-05-19 2023-11-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Positioning of an intelligent reflecting surface (irs) in a wireless communication network
CN115021915B (zh) * 2022-06-20 2024-01-05 中国电信股份有限公司 基于智能反射表面的密钥生成方法、装置、介质及设备
CN117580157A (zh) * 2022-08-05 2024-02-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 传输参数确定方法、装置、网络侧设备及介质
WO2024036570A1 (zh) * 2022-08-18 2024-02-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 基于智能超表面的预编码方法及装置
CN115459826B (zh) * 2022-09-14 2024-08-20 国网四川省电力公司电力科学研究院 一种基于三级优化的联合波束赋形方法及装置
WO2024059969A1 (zh) * 2022-09-19 2024-03-28 华为技术有限公司 一种信道估计方法、装置及系统
CN117792442A (zh) * 2022-09-20 2024-03-29 华为技术有限公司 用于通信的方法、设备和系统
CN116260502B (zh) * 2023-05-15 2023-08-18 浙江香农通信科技有限公司 一种基于可重构智能表面的双域索引调制通信方法

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180097576A1 (en) * 2015-04-03 2018-04-05 Sony Corporation Method and device for performing interference coordination in wireless communication system
CN111162823A (zh) * 2019-12-25 2020-05-15 浙江工业大学 双向mimo通信系统中预编码矩阵和相移矩阵优化方法
CN111246491A (zh) * 2020-03-10 2020-06-05 电子科技大学 一种智能反射表面辅助的太赫兹通信系统设计方法

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180097576A1 (en) * 2015-04-03 2018-04-05 Sony Corporation Method and device for performing interference coordination in wireless communication system
CN111162823A (zh) * 2019-12-25 2020-05-15 浙江工业大学 双向mimo通信系统中预编码矩阵和相移矩阵优化方法
CN111246491A (zh) * 2020-03-10 2020-06-05 电子科技大学 一种智能反射表面辅助的太赫兹通信系统设计方法

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4207491A4 *
ZHOU ZHENGYI; GE NING; WANG ZHAOCHENG; HANZO LAJOS: "Joint Transmit Precoding and Reconfigurable Intelligent Surface Phase Adjustment: A Decomposition-Aided Channel Estimation Approach", IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 69, no. 2, 27 October 2020 (2020-10-27), PISCATAWAY, NJ. USA. , pages 1228 - 1243, XP011837736, ISSN: 0090-6778, DOI: 10.1109/TCOMM.2020.3034259 *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114745038A (zh) * 2022-04-18 2022-07-12 北京航空航天大学 一种基于智能反射面双反射结构的联合波束成形设计方法
WO2023207634A1 (zh) * 2022-04-27 2023-11-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 调控方法、信息处理方法、信号调节装置、设备及介质
WO2023241448A1 (zh) * 2022-06-15 2023-12-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 测量处理方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2024044990A1 (zh) * 2022-08-30 2024-03-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 基于智能超表面的预编码方法及装置
CN115865597A (zh) * 2022-11-24 2023-03-28 浙江香农通信科技有限公司 一种空间移位键控反射调制方法

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4207491A1 (en) 2023-07-05
US20230318177A1 (en) 2023-10-05
CN114257475A (zh) 2022-03-29
CN116711158A (zh) 2023-09-05
EP4207491A4 (en) 2024-05-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022057918A1 (zh) 电子设备、无线通信方法以及计算机可读存储介质
US11799693B2 (en) Wireless communication method and wireless communication device
US10790894B2 (en) Electronic device, communication apparatus and signal processing method
WO2019096138A1 (zh) 用于无线通信系统的电子设备、方法、装置和存储介质
US10797913B2 (en) Reciprocity based FDD FD-MIMO DL channel CSI acquisition
WO2018086486A1 (zh) 电子设备、无线通信方法以及介质
WO2014101170A1 (zh) Fdd系统中信道互易性补偿方法和装置
US10225686B2 (en) Passive positioning based on directional transmissions
US20220393909A1 (en) Methods and Apparatus for Multi-Domain Conversions of High Dimensional Channel Statistics
US20220271900A1 (en) Method for configuring transmit port of downlink reference signal and communication apparatus
WO2015117532A1 (zh) 双极化天线系统doa-bf权值估计方法和装置
US12003353B2 (en) Coverage enhanced reciprocity-based precoding scheme
WO2014071737A1 (zh) 阵列天线及发射接收信号方法、装置
US11496188B2 (en) Electronic device, communication method and medium
US20230019630A1 (en) Update Method and Communications Apparatus
WO2022267853A1 (zh) 通道相位校正的方法和相关装置
US20230318717A1 (en) Ue aided antenna calibration
US20230412247A1 (en) Ue aided antenna calibration for nr - optimal port to antenna mapping
CN112368951B (zh) 执行无线电传送的方法、无线终端、接入节点
US20240048191A1 (en) Method and apparatus for calibration in distributed mimo networks
WO2024064472A1 (en) Systems and methods for a generalizable artificial intelligence model for beam management

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21868740

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202180062718.1

Country of ref document: CN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021868740

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230331

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE